JP7266847B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game value can be awarded to a player when the result of a variable display game is a special result.

In conventional gaming machines, both the first variable display game (for example, the special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (for example, the special figure 2 variable display game) can be put into a state of being executed. (so-called simultaneous variator) ( for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-148127 A

However, in such a game machine, there is a possibility that the performance cannot be executed flexibly, and the interest in the game is reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to suppress a decline in interest in a game .

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, the game control means is provided with a game control means capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays the identification information on the display device based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. Secondly, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state capable of giving a game value to a player, the game control means controls the execution of the first variable display game based on the establishment of a first starting condition. a control means; and a second control means for performing execution control of a second variation display game based on establishment of a second starting condition, wherein the first variation display game by the first control means and the second variation display game by the first control means; Both the second variable display game by the control means can be put into a state of being executed, and after the end of the special game state, the first game state and the second game state rather than the first starting condition can be set. and a second game state in which the starting condition of is likely to be established, and can be shifted to the first game state after the second game state, and in the first game state, the first game state when the number of executions of the second variation display game after transitioning to the first game state exceeds a predetermined number of times, the variation time of the second variation display game is set to a predetermined time, and the second variation display game after transition to the first game state is set to a predetermined time. When the number of executions of the variation display game is within the predetermined number of times, the variation time of the second variation display game is set to a variation time shorter than the predetermined time, and the second game is played after the special game state ends . The state is controlled according to the total number of executions of the first variable display game and the second variable display game during the second game state.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to one form of this invention, the decline of the interest of a game can be suppressed.

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main process of game control. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of fraud & prize-winning monitoring processing. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of winning number counter update processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of effect command setting processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is a time chart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is another time chart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is still another time chart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gaming machine state check process. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure starting port 1 switch processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of Toku-zu 1 normal processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of Toku-zu 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a table exemplifying a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a losing probability. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of Toku-zu 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of sorting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of high-probability variation count update processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting process 2 during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the process during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the process during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the processing during special figure 2 display. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a fanfare/interval process transition setting process; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing in special-figure 1 small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing in special-figure 2 small hit fanfare. 7 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fanfare/interval processing. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing transition setting processing 1 during opening of the big winning opening. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot operation|movement transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning a prize hole residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot end process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing in small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small-hit residual ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of design variation control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external information editing processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of design determination frequency|count signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of Toku-figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the first half of single-shot command processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the second half of single-shot command processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation interruption setting process. 9 is a flowchart showing variable restart setting processing; It is a flow chart showing a look-ahead pattern system command process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a fluctuation|variation interruption setting process. 9 is a flowchart showing variable restart setting processing; 4 is a time chart (timing chart) showing how the variable display game is forcibly terminated. 4 is a time chart showing how a variable display game is interrupted/restarted; (a) It is a time chart showing a case where the variable time timer of the special figure 2 variable display game is updated when the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. (b) is a time chart showing a case of not updating. (a) It is a time chart showing how the delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not set. (b) It is a time chart showing how to set a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the special figure 2 variable display game. (a) It is a time chart showing how the delay timer (wait time) of the special figure 2 variation display game is set regardless of the state of the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game. (b) It is a time chart showing how the delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not set. It is a time chart showing the processing when there is a possibility that the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game end at the same timing. 10 is a time chart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs while the variable display game is suspended and the power failure is restored (power is turned on). 10 is a time chart showing another example of processing when a power failure occurs while the variable display game is suspended and the power failure is restored (power is turned on). It is a front view of a game board provided in the game machine in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment; It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. It is a table illustrating the big hit probability, small hit probability, loss probability, probability variation probability in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of high probability variation count update processing in the second embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of time saving fluctuation frequency update processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is the 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing in the second embodiment. It is the 1st flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 1st flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 jackpot end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure game processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of gate switch monitoring processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric prize-winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process during a normal figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the process during normal per figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric remaining bulb processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of end processing per normal figure. It is a time chart of the operation of the first special variable winning device in the small hit RUSH. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing according to the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 usual processing according to the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process according to the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure 1 display (second half) according to the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 production mode information check processing according to the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure 2 display (second half) according to the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 production mode information check processing according to the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a fanfare/interval process transition setting process according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot end processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows an example of transition (transition, change) of the production|presentation mode which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a variable time according to the third embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which shows the transition of the screen of a display apparatus in the case of becoming normal mode through a special mode from the small-hit RUSH mode of a variable probability state. It is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board in a modification of the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 production mode information check process according to the modification of the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 production mode information check processing according to the modification of the third embodiment. It is the 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot end processing which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows an example of transition (transition, change) of the production|presentation mode based on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a variable time according to a modification of the third embodiment. In the modification of 3rd Embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which shows the transition of the screen of a display apparatus in the case of becoming normal mode through a special mode from a time saving state (time saving mode).

Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[First embodiment]
[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to an island facility via a hinge so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 .

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

Decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged at the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs therein, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged. The projecting effect unit 13 is a effect device that performs light emitting effects and the like according to the progress of the game. A lighting member arranged inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball shooting device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a performance operation device for receiving input operations from the players, a ball lending operation device for receiving input operations from the players, and a decoration device 22 for performing light-emitting performance or the like according to the game state. .

The effect operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operating device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. Also, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable state, probability variable state, high probability state), jackpot state (Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variable state continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and a predetermined probability fall lottery. There are things that continue until you win (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate the probability variable state may be always generated when the big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate the probability variable state by the big hit pattern random number, or a prize winning device having a specific area may be provided and specified. A variable probability state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display section 26. - 特許庁A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player. The balance display portion 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Beneath the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, there are an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball shooting device (not shown) and a game ball capable of being stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24 , the ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operating handle 24 increases. That is, the ball shooting device can change the shooting force (speed) of shooting the game ball into the game area in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various shooting modes with different shooting force. Can shoot balls. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 is arranged below the upper tray unit with a predetermined gap from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball extraction hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 30a that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a warp passage 40a for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b in which the game balls passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. It is Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the first start prize winning port 36 and the second start prize winning port 37, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b is the first start prize winning port 36 or the second It is easy to win a prize at the 2-start prize-winning port 37.例文帳に追加

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, the first start winning prize area (first start winning area, special figure 1 start opening, start opening 1) 36 that provides the start condition (start condition) of the special figure fluctuation display game is provided. At the time of left-handed hitting (normal hitting), it becomes easier for the game ball to win (enter) the first starting prize-winning port 36.例文帳に追加In the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40, a second starting winning opening (second starting winning area, special figure 2 starting opening, starting opening 2) 37 is provided. At the time of right-handed hitting, the game ball becomes easy to win (enter) the second starting prize-winning port 37.例文帳に追加When the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37, a special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

In the game area 32 below the second starting winning opening 37, there is an attacker type opening the lower winning opening by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the lower winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3). A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 38c is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the state in which the large winning port is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize balls) is awarded to the player. A lower special winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the lower special winning opening as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

In addition, in the game area 32 on the upper left of the center case 40, there is an attacker-type actuator that opens the upper grand prize opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward by an upper grand prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A second special variable winning device 39 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 39c is provided. As with the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39 changes the large winning port from a closed state (disadvantageous closed state for the player) to an open state (a player A game state that is advantageous to the player), and by facilitating the inflow of game balls into the upper grand prize opening, a predetermined game value (prize balls) is given to the player. In addition, in the upper special winning opening, an upper special winning opening switch 39a (see FIG. 3) (two switches in this embodiment) is arranged as detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

Game balls win prizes in the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the lower big winning port of the first special variable winning device 38, and the upper big winning port of the second special variable winning device 39. Then, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 according to the type of winning prize opening. In addition, in the game area 32 below the first special variable prize winning device 38, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that do not win a prize such as a prize winning port is provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game (special figure 1 game), a special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 A collective display device 50 is provided for executing the game)). The collective display device 50 includes display sections D1 to D20 for displaying information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 is a first special figure variation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator) (lamp D1) and a second special figure for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) etc. It has a variation display unit 52 (special figure 2 display) (lamp D2). In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display portion 53 (lamps D3 to D7) that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of openings and closings of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) and the occurrence of the small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display. It has a memory display unit 54 (special figure 1 reservation display) (lamps D11-D14) for notifying the number of game start (hold) memories.

Furthermore, in the collective display device 50, the first game state display portion 55 (first game state display device, probability state display portion) (lamps D15 to D18) for displaying that the winning probability state is a high probability state ), the second game state display unit 56 (second game state display device) (lamps D8 to D10) that lights up when a big win or a small win occurs to notify that it is right-handed (when right-handed). is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 has a third game state display section 57 (third game state display device, interrupted state indicator) (lamps D19, D20).

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the special figure variation display game will be described. In addition, in the present embodiment, a normal pattern start gate is not provided, and a so-called normal pattern variation display game is not executed. A movable member for opening and closing the second start winning opening 37 is not provided in the second starting winning opening 37 .

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. placed at various places in the game area 32, and enters the general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36, the second It wins the start winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of the winning winning port The corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper tray 21 through the payout device.

As a basic game method, in the normal game state, the player hits left and wins the game ball in the first start winning port 36 to start the special figure 1 variable display game, small hit / big hit, probability variable state, etc. is generated, the player switches to right-handed hitting and aims at the second start winning opening 37 or the big winning opening. The display device 41 can display an instruction indicating whether the player should hit left or right, and if the player does not follow the instruction, the display device 41 or the speakers 19a and 19b notify an error. It is possible.

Winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and winning to the second starting winning opening 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the first start winning hole 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), and the second start winning hole The game ball that has won 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (1 in this embodiment).

At the time of detection of the starting winning ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big win pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory (special figure start memory) for each predetermined number of times (for example, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the maximum 4 times) is stored. The number of memories of the special figure 1 start winning memory (special figure 1 starting memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41 Is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described later, the special figure 2 variation display game can be simultaneously executed (running) independently of the special figure 1 variation display game, and further, the special figure 2 variation The special figure 2 starting prize during execution of the display game or during the big hit is invalidated (detection of the starting port 2 switch 37a is invalidated). Therefore, the special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 starting memory) does not accumulate substantially, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts as soon as the special figure 2 starting winning memory is generated. That is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not performed at the timing when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 37, the variation start condition (start condition) of the special figure 2 variation display game is established. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 start winning memory number is configured not to be displayed on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41 . In addition, it is also possible to display the special figure 2 start winning memory number on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) on the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) on the special figure 2 indicator 52 based on the winning to the second start winning opening 37 or the second start memory. do.

In the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the identification information (special symbol 1 (special figure 1), special symbol 2 (special figure 2)) in the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 is variably displayed, and then a predetermined result mode is stopped.

In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be put into a running state at the same time (both) independently of each other. When it occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed stopped), the other special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result.

When the game ball wins in the second start winning port 37 by hitting to the right in the normal game state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate, but basically a long fluctuation (long fluctuation, for example 10 minutes) Since it is performed, it will be forcibly lost and stopped by a big hit or a small hit that occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during this time.

Also, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

The decoration special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of numbers etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of characters to enhance interest.

When the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), a special figure fluctuation display game As a result, a special result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbols, and a big win state (special game state) is entered. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 and/or the second special variable winning device 39 are activated by energizing the lower large winning opening solenoid (38b) and/or the upper large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). , the big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, several seconds or several tens of seconds). That is, the large winning openings provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are opened wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, during which time the player can win many game balls. A privilege that can be acquired is given.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), special figure fluctuation display As a result of the game, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and a small win state is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, although a big hit random number value is used also for determination of a small hit, a small hit value (small hit determination value) differs from a big hit value (big hit determination value).

In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 and/or the second special variable winning device 39 energize the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b and/or the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) to activate the large winning opening. is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time (for example, 2 seconds or less). In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning game state) than in the big winning state (special game state), the game that the player can win in the small winning state is more than the big winning state. The value (the number of acquired balls) is small. In both the small winning state and the big winning state, the big winning opening is opened, but the big winning state may be called the first special game state, and the small winning state may be called the second special game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the variable probability state, there is a small hit RUSH state in which small hits occur frequently due to a short fluctuation special figure 2 fluctuation display game with a short fluctuation time and a large number of prize balls can be obtained due to the small hit. Become. In the small hit rush, the first special variable winning device 38 and/or the second special variable winning device 39 are opened with high frequency.

Here, the difference between the big win and the small win will be explained.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag is set for continuously operating the variable winning device (the first special variable winning device 38 and/or the second special variable winning device 39). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. is released.

In this embodiment, in all types of jackpots, after the jackpot state ends, the state shifts to the variable probability state, and the variable probability state continues until a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of variable display games are executed after the jackpot ends. . That is, the gaming machine 10 is an ST (special time) machine, and the jackpot symbols are only definite variable symbols. On the other hand, after the end of the small winning state (for a short time compared to the big winning state), the game returns to the original game state before the start of the small winning state. The probability of a big win is low during the state of a big win, but during the state of a small win, the probability of a big win before the start of the state of a small win is maintained (the probability state does not change in the state of a small win). Therefore, the jackpot probability is maintained at a high probability (probability variable state) throughout the small hit RUSH state.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are configured as separate indicators, and each special figure variation display game may take a running state (running state) at the same time, but on the other hand If a big hit or a small hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed stopped), the other special figure fluctuation display game being executed is forced to lose. Stop.

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. Also, the decoration special figure variation display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may both be in an execution state (running state) at the same time, but one of the decoration special figure variation display games (a special result or a specific result is derived and stop-displayed), the other decorative special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch (38a, 39a) uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil, which is equipped with a magnetic detection coil. It is In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the game machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch with positive contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. a CPU unit 110 having an input port; an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc.;

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and the reference clock for the random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting control signals such as .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112 . When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111c in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b stores non-volatile information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111c is a work area for the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-reach state includes multiple ready-to-reach effects, and the system of ready-to-reach effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expectations) includes normal reach (N reach) and special 1 reach (SP1 reach). , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) increases in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

In addition, the degree of expectation of the production (notice) suggests the probability that the production will be a big hit when the production is selected, the selection rate of the production when it is a big hit, and the production when it is not a big hit (when it is lost). It can be calculated based on the selectivity or the like.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device, and output the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. A random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining pattern random numbers and variation patterns in special figure variation display games (including the execution time of variation display games in various reach and non-reach variation displays) and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111a based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. .

In addition, the CPU 111a acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 111a serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start prize winning port 36, and a It is connected to the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and the upper large winning port switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and supplied from these switches An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for inputting a negative logic signal having a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and converting it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, the lower special prize winning port switch 38a and the upper special prize winning port switch 39a are output to the third input port 124. is entered in

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Signals from a switch 63 and a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12 or the like are inputted. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. A first input port 122 is provided for taking in an overflow switch signal and a touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operating handle 24 and supplying the signal to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . The frame radio wave irregularity signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to receive commands. is a signal. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full).

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and an initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (lower grand prize opening solenoid) 38b that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the first special variable prize winning device 38, and a solenoid (upper grand prize opening solenoid) that opens the second special variable prize winning device 39. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open/close data of the solenoid 39b.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal 71 . The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signal of the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and a fourth driver 138c for outputting an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to an external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU (production control program) and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and power is supplied at the time of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of retaining stored contents at least, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 forming a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the performance, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to inform the processing status such as the completion of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which voice data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via the command I / F331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc., transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, the production control command signal (production command) receive as Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41).

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built into the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor inside the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the configuration described above and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.

A start winning prize (start memory) is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from a start port 1 switch 36a provided in a first start prize winning port 36, and a special figure 1 variation display game jackpot determination is made based on the start memory. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning prize port 37. The numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variable display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37). make a means

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and displays the special game state (jackpot). state). In the process of generating the special game state, for example, the CPU 111a opens the opening/closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 with the large winning opening solenoid 38b, or moves the second special variable winning device 39 with the large winning opening solenoid 39b. Control is performed to open the member 39c and to allow game balls to flow into the big winning opening.

Then, it is determined whether a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or whether a predetermined openable time (for example, about 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. One round is to open the big winning mouth until one of the conditions is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game )I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state is finished based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result (jackpot result in this embodiment) in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state (low probability state). Also, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game of special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) High probability state and Even if it becomes, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed so that the variation time of the special figure variation display game is shortened. In this embodiment, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are configured to occur at the same time.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. .

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing procedures of main processing (main program) executed by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****" or "S****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to the prohibited state, and the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power-on delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value to the power-on delay timer, sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) for performing various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the program starts normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the standby time starts, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. detectable. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. I have to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

When the power-on delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of timing the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, two times) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus ( A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is ON (A1009).

Game control device 100, when the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is "Y"), whether or not the power failure monitoring signal has been turned on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. Determine (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to step A1009 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (the result of A1009 is "N"), that is, if the power failure does not occur, -1 update the power-on delay timer (A1011), It is determined whether or not the timer value is 0 (A1012). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008 for setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal.

In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (result of A1012 is "Y"), that is, when the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read and write RAM, EEPROM, etc. memory) is permitted (A1013), and OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state of no output) (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015 ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch is turned on based on the previously read state of the first input port 122 (A1016).

Game control device 100, when the initialization switch is off (result of A1016 is "N"), determines whether the value of power failure inspection area 1 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). If it is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the blackout inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is "Y"), executes the checksum calculation process of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). , determines whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power failure (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A1021 in FIG. 5B, and the process for normal restoration (recovery) from the power failure is executed.

In addition, when the initialization switch is on (the result of A1016 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the blackout inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is "N"). Or, if the result of A1018 is "N") and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1023 in FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. form.

The game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. A busy signal status area (payout busy signal flag area) for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is cleared. It is in an undefined state indicating that it has not been determined.

And the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (A1022), and the process of step A1028 is executed. Commands at the time of power failure recovery include a model designation command that indicates the type of game machine, a decoration special 1 reservation number command that indicates the number of special 1 reservations, a probability information command that indicates the probability state, and a screen designation command. . The command for specifying the screen is a command for specifying the display contents of the display device 41. For example, when both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are in normal processing (when neither variation nor hit operation is in progress) is the command for the customer waiting demo, otherwise it is the command for the recovery screen.

In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted (backed up by RWM If there is a special figure game interruption flag), including an interrupted command (interrupted command) indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted or that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted good.

On the other hand, when executing the processing of step A1023 after executing steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibition area to access permission (A1023). Furthermore, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1024), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1025).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1026). The area to be initialized is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits a command for RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and executes the processing of step A1028. The commands at the time of RAM initialization include a model designation command, a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command, a probability information command, a command for RAM initialization, and the like. By the RAM initialization command, the effect control device 300 displays the customer waiting demonstration on the screen of the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization with the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 and the upper speakers 19a and 19b. (eg for 30 seconds).

It should be noted that the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1022 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1027 further includes a production mode information command indicating the state of the production mode depending on the model, a time saving state A time saving number information command indicating the number of remaining games is included.

The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1028). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process of step A1028, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1029). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining jackpot patterns (jackpot patterns) Random number 1 and jackpot pattern random number 2)) are saved in a predetermined area of RWM as initial values (start values) (A1030), and interrupts are permitted (A1031). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and destroying the regularity of the random numbers (A1032). Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, the jackpot pattern random numbers, and the small hit pattern random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) with the same period.

In addition, in the big hit pattern random number and the small hit pattern random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number and the small hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process of step A1032, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus (A1033), and monitors power failure. It is determined whether the signal is on (A1034). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1034 is "N"), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1032. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (A1031) before the initial value random number update process (A1032), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be initialized. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process due to waiting due to the value random number update process.

Note that the initial value random number updating process in step A1032 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt before updating and releasing the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1034 is "Y"), the game control device 100 checks whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1033. Determine (A1035). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is "N"), the process returns to step A1034 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is "Y"), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, once interrupt is prohibited (A1036), and OFF data is output to all output ports (A1037).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves power failure inspection area check data 1 in power failure inspection area 1 (A1038), and saves power failure inspection area check data 2 in power failure inspection area 2 (A1039). Further, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1040), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1041). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1042), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the operation of the RAM 111c capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an input process of taking in inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Furthermore, based on the output data set in various processes, output processing for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) is executed (A1304). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state. .

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1305), further random number update process 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower special winning port switch 38a, and the upper special winning port switch 39a, and the monitoring of errors. (Whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) Winning hole switch/status monitoring processing is executed (A1308).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A1309). Subsequently, a special figure 1 game process for performing a process relating to a special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A1310), and then a special figure 2 game process for performing a process relating to a special figure 2 variation display game is performed (A1311). Details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the game machine 10, and executes a segment LED editing process for driving the segment LEDs for displaying various information about special figure variation games and games so as to display desired contents. (A1312).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1313). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1314).

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1315). Details of the external information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends. When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning hole switch/state monitoring process. The winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed at step A1308 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first prepares the cheating monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper special winning opening switch 39a (two pieces) in the upper special winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) (A2001). Then, a fraudulent and winning monitoring process is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and to detect a normal winning (A2002). The details of the illegality & winning monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

The fraud monitoring table contains a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraud winning number area, the fraud winning error notification command, the fraud Information on the upper limit of the number of winnings (the number of determined fraudulent occurrences), a winning opening monitoring table, and notification timer update information (permission/update) is defined. In addition, information on the number of repetitions of monitoring (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1, and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined in the winning opening monitoring table. These fraud monitoring table and winning slot monitoring table are prepared for each switch to be monitored.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower special winning opening switch 38a in the lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (A2003). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (A2004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win (A2005). ), a winning number counter update process for updating the winning number is executed (A2006).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process (A2007). In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation number) is counted as the number of abnormal fluctuations in the normal game state (when the probability is low), and the number of abnormal fluctuations is the specified value ( For example, when 5) is reached, the effect control device 300 is made to perform error notification. The details of the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose state should be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time (A2008 ). The state scan counter is updated with a range of 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2009). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2010). Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shot ball running out error) based on the shot ball running out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the payout error status signal (payout error). monitoring is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2012).

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave fraud signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2013). Then, when the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2013 is "N"), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2013 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2014), and determines whether an error has occurred. A gaming machine state check process for determining the state of is executed (A2015).

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 3 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. Incidentally, in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter is 1 to 3, it is not defined.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes payout busy signal check processing for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2016 ), ending the winning slot switch/status monitoring process.

Note that the processing from steps A2014 to A2016 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2014 to A2016 is performed every 16 ms.

[Fraud & Winning Monitoring Process]
FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the procedure of fraud & winning monitoring processing. The cheating & winning monitoring process is executed at steps A2002 and A2004 in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

The cheating & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the lower large winning opening switch 38 a of the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39 a of the second special variable winning device 39 . As for the big winning openings (special variable winning devices 38, 39), fraudulent acts such as forcibly opening the opening/closing member, inserting game balls, and paying out the winning balls are likely to occur, so fraud is monitored in addition to detection of winning. .

The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring (A2101), and determines whether or not it is during the fraud monitoring period (A2102). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the lower large winning opening switch 38a. Alternatively, it is a period other than the special game state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors is the upper big winning opening switch 39a.

Then, when it is the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). In addition, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is "Y"), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the fraudulent winning number after the addition is used to determine the illegal occurrence of the monitoring target. It is determined whether or not the number (for example, 5) is equal to or more (A2105).

The reason why the determination number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball passes the effective period of the count switch. This is to avoid judging that the game is fraudulent when the player wins a prize or the signal contains noise, and to avoid easily judging an error even though the game is not fraudulent.

Then, if the number is not equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110). If the number is equal to or greater than the determined number (the result of A2105 is "Y"), the number of fraudulent prize winnings is kept at the fraudulent occurrence determination number (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent prize winning notification timer area. (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraudulent occurrence command (A2108), and further prepares a fraudulent prize occurrence flag as a fraudulent flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110), and sets the number of winning balls. Counter update processing is executed (A2111). Details of the winning number counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the game control device 100 loads target notification timer update information (A2112), and determines whether or not update of the notification timer is permitted (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (the result of A2113 is "N"), the illegality & winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if update of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is "Y"), if the target notification timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the error-monitored winning prize opening switch is the upper large winning prize opening switch 39a, and permitted when the error monitoring target winning prize opening switch is the other upper large winning prize opening switch 39a. not. As a result, the update of the notification timer is doubled in regard to the fraudulent notification of the second special variable prize winning device 39, preventing the time from running out in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . In addition, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the lower big winning opening switch 38a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and if the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired terminates the illegality & prize-winning monitoring process. Also, if the value of the notification timer is 0 (result of A2115 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancellation command is prepared (A2116) and an fraud flag is generated. to prepare an illegal winning cancellation flag (A2117). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

When the game control device 100 is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process of this time, clears the target number of illegal winnings (A2119).

In addition, after the processing of step A2119 is completed, or if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "N"), the game control device 100 detects the illegality & winning monitoring processing before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in step A2120, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area.

Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (the result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (A2121), and command setting processing is performed. (A2122). After that, the illegality & prize-winning monitoring process is terminated.

By the above processing, the fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the occurrence of fraud, the fraud cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the cancellation of the fraud, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Processing for updating winning number counter]
FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning number counter update process. Winning number counter update processing is executed at step A2111 of fraud & winning monitoring processing shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first acquires the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (exactly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. (A2202). If there is no input (result of A2202 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2212).

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2202 is "Y"), loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203), and +1 update (A2204). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value causes an overflow (A2205).

If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2205 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After the processing of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is "Y"), the value of target win number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

After that, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether the updated value causes an overflow (A2209). If no overflow occurs (the result of A2209 is "N"), the updated value is saved in winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After the processing of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "Y"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211). Then, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches has ended (A2212).

If the monitoring of all switches has not been completed (the result of A2212 is "N"), the game control device 100 returns to the processing of step A2202 for determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch. Also, when the monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2212 is "Y"), the win number counter update process is completed. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning to the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Production command setting process]
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A2301). Further, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A2302).

Also, if the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2302 is "N"), the game control device 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2303).

When the transmission buffer is full (the result of A2302 is "Y"), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2301.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A2304), and determines whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A2305). If the transmission buffer is full (result of A2305 is "Y"), the process returns to step A2304.

Further, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2305 is "N"), the game control device 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2306), and then sets the effect command. End the process.

As described above, by transmitting the performance commands to the performance control device 300 through serial communication, the load on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the performance commands can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is no longer necessary to take in commands within the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal Fluctuation Monitoring Process]
FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process. The special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process is executed at step A2007 in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation check flag is set (A2401). In addition, as will be described later, the special figure 1 variation check flag is set each time the special figure 1 variation display game starts in a low probability state (including normal game state). If the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2401 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2407.

If the special figure 1 variation check flag is set (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the special figure 1 variation check flag (A2402), updates the special figure 1 variation number by +1 ( 1 is added) (A2403). Then, it is determined whether or not special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (eg 18) (A2404). When special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than specified value (the result of A2404 is "Y"), it moves to the processing of step A2407.

The game control device 100, if the special figure 1 fluctuation number is more than the specified value (the result of A2404 is "N"), -1 update if the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is not 0 (subtract only 1) (A2405) , Toku-zu 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (A2406).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation check flag is set (A2407). If the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2410. In addition, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set each time when the special figure 2 variation display game starts in a low probability state (including normal game state).

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), clears the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (A2408), updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number +1 (A2409). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is smaller than a specified value (eg 5) (A2410).

Game control device 100, if the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is more than the specified value (the result of A2410 is "N"), the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the specified value used for the determination of step A2410 the number of special figure 2 abnormal variation (A2411). Next, set the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer as an error notification timer (A2412), and prepare the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation ( A2413), to prepare a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command as a production command (A2414), and to move to the processing of step A2419.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2410 is "Y"), -1 updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer (A2415). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer has timed up (A2416). If the time is not up (the result of A2416 is "N"), end the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process.

When the time is up (the result of A2416 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag (A2417) and prepares a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command as a production command (A2418). . Next, the prepared flag determines whether it is the same as the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (A2419). If the prepared flag is the same as the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (the result of A2419 is "Y"), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated.

Game control device 100, when the prepared flag is different from the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (the result of A2419 is "N"), whether the prepared flag is special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag is determined (A2420). If the prepared flag is not a release flag (the result of A2420 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2422.

Game control device 100, when the prepared flag is a release flag (the result of A2420 is "Y"), clears the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number to 0 (A2421). That is, in a state in which the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag is set in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag is prepared (A2417), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is cleared to 0 do. After that, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area in RWM (A2422). That is, when the prepared flag is different from the flag of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area is rewritten to the prepared flag. Next, the production command setting process for setting the production command is executed (A2423), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is ended.

In addition, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal variation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 variation display game) is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area, the external information editing process described later , the security signal is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) as external information. When the production control device 300 receives the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation generation command as the production command, the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b execute the notification of the error.

In the normal game state (with a low jackpot probability), the player normally hits to the left and aims to win the first start prize-winning port 36, but the second start prize-winning port 37 is preferred over the first start prize-winning port 36. The player may aim at the second starting prize opening 37 by hitting to the right when winning a prize is advantageous to the player (when the probability of a small win is high). In this case, the winning to the second start winning opening 37 may cause the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed, and an error is reported to the player to stop hitting to the right. It should be noted that, in the normal game state, if left-handed hitting is performed, processing is performed in the normal route as shown by the dotted line in FIG. Fig. 2 Abnormal fluctuation notification timer does not start either.

With reference to the time charts of FIGS. 12A to 12C, the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process will be further described. FIGS. 12A-12C illustrate the results of the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process described above.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed a plurality of times in the normal game state (hit probability is low probability), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches the specified value (here, 5) (A2410 The result is "N"), the initial value (60 seconds) of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command can be set (A2412, A2414), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is received The control device 300 can start reporting the error through the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

After that, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number has been subtracted by 1 from the specified value (here 5) (A2411), so unless the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set again, from the next special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer can be continuously updated by -1 (the result of A2410 is "Y"). Effect control device 300 can continue the error notification until the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer times up due to the lapse of the period (60 seconds) corresponding to the initial value and receives the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command. Note that the payout of prize balls is performed even during the error notification.

During the error notification period (60 seconds), external information is output to the external information terminal 71, and an error occurrence can be notified to an external device such as a hall computer. A machine error status signal can be output (external information editing process to be described later).

In addition, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches the specified value (here 5) again during the timing of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer (during error notification), the initial value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is again 60 seconds error notification can be started from there (timer reset). Also, when a big hit occurs (start), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is sent, and special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number, special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer, special figure 1 fluctuation number are cleared to 0 (special figure display described later middle processing, fanfare/interval middle processing transition setting processing).

Also, in FIG. 11, the variation check flag is set when the special figure variation display game is started in a low probability state, but the variation check flag is in a low probability state and there was a prize to the start winning opening. You may perform control as what is set in case. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12B, control is performed using the winning number instead of the variable number, and there are multiple winnings to the second start winning port 37 (special figure 2 winning) in the normal game state. When the abnormal winning number reaches a specified value (here, 5), error notification can be started.

Also, in the control of FIG. 11, as shown in FIG. 12A, after the end of the error notification by the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is set to 0 (A2421), but as shown in FIG. FIG. 2 Abnormal fluctuation number (abnormal prize winning number) may be maintained at a specified value.

In FIG. 12C, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches the specified value (here 18) (the result of A2404 is "N"), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 and is reduced from 4 to 3, for example (A2405), the situation where the special figure 1 variation number is cleared to 0 and changes from 18 to 0 is shown (A2406). In this way, even if the special figure 2 variation display game is executed a plurality of times by right-handed hitting in the normal game state (hitting probability is low) and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number increases, the player can hit left-handed. When the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches the specified value, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is reduced and the error notification can be avoided.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine status check process is executed at steps A2010, A2012 and A2015 in the winning opening switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first acquires the state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2501). The state scan counter is set to a value ranging from 0 to 3 corresponding to the game state. Incidentally, the relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is ON (A2502). If the signal to be checked is not ON (the result of A2502 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is OFF, a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (A2503), and the target state OFF command is acquired. and prepare (A2504). Furthermore, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2505). The state-off flag indicates a normal state with respect to error-related signals, and indicates a no-touch state with respect to touch switch signals.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is ON (the result of A2502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a state ON flag as a state flag (A2506), acquires the target state ON command, prepares (A2507). Furthermore, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2508). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for error-related signals, and indicates a touched state for touch switch signals.

When the processing of step A2505 or step A2508 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control region matches the acquired signal state (A2509). If they do not match (the result of A2509 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2510), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2511).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2512). Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated state monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the corresponding timer comparison value (A2513). If the value of the updated status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by -1, and the timer comparison value - It remains at a value of 1 (A2514). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2515). If they match (the result of A2515 is "Y"), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2515 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2516). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2517), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state ON command is an error type command, the effect control device 300 is made to start error notification.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting port switch monitoring process (A1309) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning monitoring table for monitoring winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and executes hard random number acquisition processing for acquiring hard random numbers. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a starting opening prize to the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703). Then, when there is no start-up winning (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of winning is in a low probability state (A2704) when there is a starting opening winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is "Y"). . Then, if it is in the low probability state (including during the normal game state) (the result of A2704 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2707.

If the probability of winning is not in a low probability state (if it is in a high probability state) (the result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a right-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A2705), and effects Command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 can display on the display device 41 as a warning a right-handed instruction display for instructing right-handed when there is a starting opening prize to the first starting winning opening 36 in a high probability state. can.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension due to winning to the first start winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2707), and executes special figure starting port 1 switch processing (A2708 ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting opening 2 winning monitoring table for monitoring winning to the second starting winning opening (starting opening 2) 37 (A2709), and executes hard random number acquisition processing for obtaining hard random numbers. (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a starting opening prize to the second starting winning opening 37 (A2711). If there is no starting point winning (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting point switch monitoring process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when there is a starting opening prize to the second starting winning opening 37 (the result of A2711 is "Y"), determines whether the probability of winning is in a high probability state (that is, variable probability state). Judge (A2712). If it is not in a high probability state (if it is in a low probability state) (the result of A2712 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is in a big hit state (A2713). If it is not in the jackpot state (the result of A2713 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is in the high-probability final variation (A2714). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag that is set in the high-probability fluctuation frequency updating process described later.

Here, the high probability final variation (high probability final variation) is the final special figure variation display game when the special figure variation display game starts in a high probability state, for example, ST (special time) This is the final special figure variation display game when the high probability state is maintained with respect to the start of variation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the end of the big hit.

If the game control device 100 is not in the high-probability final variation (result of A2714 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A2715), and executes effect command setting processing (A2716). As a result, the performance control device 300 displays the left-handed instruction display for instructing left-handed hitting on the display device 41 as a warning when there is a start-up prize to the second start-up prize-winning port 37 during the normal game state. can be done.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold due to winning to the second start winning port 37 (starting port 2) (A2717), and executes special figure starting port 2 switch processing (A2718 ), ending the starting port switch monitoring process. If the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (result of A2712 is "Y"), if it is in a jackpot state (result of A2713 is "Y"), if it is in a high probability final fluctuation (result of A2714 is "Y"), the processing of steps A2717 and A2718 is executed without preparing the left-handed instruction notification command.

[Special figure start gate 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening 1 switch processing (A2708) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 1 switch process.

First, the game control device 100 loads the starting port 1 signal output count, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 1 switch 36a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 (A2901). Further, the value of the loaded starting port 1 signal output frequency is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output frequency overflows (A2903).

If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the value after updating in the starting port 1 signal output number area of RWM (A2904). On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process of step A2905 is executed without executing the process of step A2904.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the update target special figure holding (start memory) number corresponding to the start port 1 switch 36a is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A2905). When the special figure reservation number is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port 1 switch processing is terminated.

Game control device 100, when the number of special figures pending is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A2906), updates the number of special figures 1 pending +1 (A2907). It should be noted that the special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including sorting of look-ahead variation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number (A2908), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process in the RWM jackpot random number storage area (A2909 ). Subsequently, the jackpot pattern random number is extracted and prepared (A2910), and the jackpot pattern random number is saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2911). Further, a small winning design random number is extracted and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (A2912). Next, save the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas of the RWM (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) ( A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure reservation information determination process (prefetching process, advance determination process) for determining the special figure reservation information (A2914), and the decoration special figure 1 reservation number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number The command is prepared as an effect command (A2915), the effect command setting process is executed (A2916), and the special figure starting port 1 switch process is terminated. In addition, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17 .

[Special figure start gate 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening 2 switch process (A2718) in the starting opening switch monitoring process described above will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing.

The start port 2 signal output count, which is the number of times information regarding the number of wins to the start port 2 switch 37a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded (A3001). moreover,
The value of the loaded start port 2 signal output count is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A3003).

If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start port 2 signal output number area of RWM (A3004). On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid, that is, whether the detection of the starting opening 2 switch 37a is invalid (A3005). In addition, during the stop of the big hit change / small hit change (during the processing during the special figure display described later), during the big hit state (from the stop of the big hit change to the end processing of the big hit described later), during the small hit state (from the stop of the small hit change Until the small hit end processing described later), when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed (during fluctuation), even if there is a game ball entering the second start winning opening 37, the second start It is treated as if there was no winning in the winning opening 37 and is invalidated. Game control device 100, when the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid (result of A3005 is "Y"), ends the special figure starting opening 2 switch processing.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the winning to the second start winning opening 37 is not invalid (the result of A3005 is "N"), sets the special figure 2 reservation number to 1 (A3006). In addition, as soon as the special figure 2 start memory occurs, the special figure 2 variable display game is configured to start, but the special figure 2 reservation number is set to 1 due to the necessity of control. Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 start memory (A3007), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process in the RWM jackpot random number storage area (A3008). .

Subsequently, the jackpot pattern random number is extracted (A3009), and the jackpot pattern random number is saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A3010). Furthermore, a small winning design random number is extracted and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (A3011). Next, save the variation pattern random number (variation pattern random number 2, 3) in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of RWM (variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) (A3012), special figure start entrance 2 End the switch processing.

In addition, as described above, as soon as the special figure 2 start memory occurs, the special figure 2 variation display game is configured to start, so in the special figure start opening 2 switch processing, unlike the special figure start opening 1 switch processing , Special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetching processing, pre-determination processing) is not performed, and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is not prepared.

In this way, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the starting winning areas of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, and performs the variable display game. It constitutes a starting winning memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory to be an execution right. In addition, the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 as the first starting memory ( Special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 start winning memory), and various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning port 37 are set to the upper limit of a predetermined number (here 1) It is stored as 2 start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 start winning memory).

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (A2914) in the special figure start opening 1 switch process described above will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetching processing, prior determination processing). In addition, the special figure reservation information determination process is executed only for the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 .

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (that is, variable probability state) (A3101). If it is not in a high probability state (the result of A3101 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is in a big hit state (A3102). If it is not in the jackpot state (the result of A3102 is "N"), the jackpot determination process is executed based on the jackpot random number value stored as the first start memory (A3103).

It should be noted that if the high probability state (result of A3101 is "Y"), or if it is in the jackpot state (result of A3102 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process does not perform the jackpot determination process etc. Terminate as it is (pre-determination (prefetching) is not performed).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (A3104). If the judgment result is a big hit (the result of A3104 is "Y"), a big hit pattern random number check table is set (A3105), and the big hit stop pattern information corresponding to the prepared big hit pattern random number is acquired (A3106), step A3111. to process.

The game control device 100, if the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (in case of loss) (the result of A3104 is "N"), performs the small hit determination process based on the big hit random value stored as the first start memory. Execute (A3107), and determine whether or not the determination result is a small hit (A3108). In addition, in this embodiment, a big hit random number is used also for determination of a small hit.

If the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (the result of A3108 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the stop symbol information for the small hit (A3109), and if the determination result is not a small hit (A3108 (A3110), the stop symbol information is set (A3110).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the acquired or set stop symbol information as an effect command (A3111), and executes effect command setting processing (A3112). Then, special figure 1 information setting processing (A3113) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 1 for setting the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game A variation pattern setting process (A3114) is executed. Subsequently, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number and the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A3115), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3116).

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is in a big hit state or a small hit state (A3201). If neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3201 is "N"), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3202). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the number of game balls at the lower big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 Monitor detections.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (subtracts only 1) (A3203). The special figure 1 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. If it is during the big hit state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A3201 is "Y"), the process of step A3203 is performed without performing the process of step A3202. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3204). If the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3204 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3219.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3204 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the game control device 100 changes to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3205). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is obtained using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3206). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made by the special figure 1 game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special figure 1 game processing number (A3207).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3207, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, sets the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and sets the effect. And, to perform special figure 1 usual processing such as setting of information necessary for performing processing during special figure 1 fluctuation (A3208). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 usual processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1, sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display, etc. Execute special figure 1 during fluctuation processing (A3209). In addition, the details of the processing during special figure 1 fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "2" in step A3207, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of big hit, A special figure 1 displaying process for setting a fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening pattern, setting information necessary for fanfare/interval processing, etc. is executed (A3210). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43 .

If the game processing number is "3" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning gate, updates the number of openings, and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate. Fanfare/during interval processing for setting etc. is executed (A3211). Details of the fanfare/during interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A3207, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if the final round; A process during the opening of a large winning opening for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing for the large winning opening is executed (A3212). The details of the processing during the opening of the big winning opening will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "5" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round, A big winning hole remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end process is executed (A3213). The details of the big winning hole remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "6" at step A3207, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), or information necessary for executing special figure 1 normal processing Execute the special figure 1 jackpot end processing for setting etc. (A3214). Details of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, sets information necessary for processing during the small winning, etc. (A3215). In addition, the details of the processing during the small winning fanfare will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 .

If the game processing number is "8" in step A3207, the game control device 100 performs processing for setting a small hit end command, setting of information necessary for performing small hit remaining ball processing, and the like. During the hit process is executed (A3216). In addition, the details of the process during the small hit will be described later with reference to FIG. 56 .

If the game processing number is "9" at step A3207, the game control device 100 performs processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, and special figure 1 small winning end processing. A small hit remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing is executed (A3217). Details of the small hit remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "10" at step A3207, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), or information necessary for executing special figure 1 normal processing Executes special figure 1 small hit end processing for setting etc. (A3218). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 58 .

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A3219), special figure 1 display The symbol variation control processing related to the device 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game processing is ended.

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is in a big hit state or a small hit state (A3301). If neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3301 is "N"), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the number of game balls at the lower big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 Monitor detections.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (subtracts only 1) (A3303). The special figure 2 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. If it is during the big hit state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A3301 is "Y"), the process of step A3303 is performed without performing the process of step A3302. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3304). If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3304 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3322.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the special figure 2 game processing timer It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions is 0 (A3305). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3306), and the special figure 2 game processing timer A long-variation timer value (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3307). It should be noted that, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game is a long variation, and when the variation time is long (eg, 10 minutes), the timer for the variation time cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3303-A3307 By repeating the count of the timer value for long fluctuation by the processing of , a timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y") and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y") , The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3308). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3309). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special figure 2 game processing number (A3310).

When the game processing number is "0" at step A3310, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, sets the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and sets the effect. Or, to perform special figure 2 usual processing such as setting of information necessary for performing processing during special figure 2 fluctuation (A3311). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 usual processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process, etc. Perform special figure 2 during fluctuation processing (A3312). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40 .

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3310, if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, Special figure 2 display processing for setting fanfare time according to the jackpot opening pattern, fanfare/interval processing, etc. is executed (A3313). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning gate, updates the number of openings, and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate. A fanfare/during-interval process for setting etc. is executed (A3314). It should be noted that the fanfare/during-interval processing is common to that executed within the special-figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A3310, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if the final round; A process during the opening of the big winning opening for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing for the big winning opening is executed (A3315). It should be noted that the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round, A big winning hole remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process is executed (A3316). Incidentally, the big winning hole remaining ball processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "6" at step A3310, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process ( A3317). The details of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "7" at step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, sets information necessary for performing small winning middle processing, and the like. (A3318). It should be noted that the process during the small win fanfare is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 .

When the game processing number is "8" in step A3310, the game control device 100 performs processing for setting a small hit end command, setting of information necessary for performing small hit remaining ball processing, and the like. During the hit process is executed (A3319). It should be noted that the small hit middle process is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 56 .

If the game processing number is "9" at step A3310, the game control device 100 performs processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, and special figure 2 small winning end processing. A small hit remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing is executed (A3320). Incidentally, the minor hit remaining ball processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "10" at step A3310, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3321). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 .

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A3322), special figure 2 display The symbol variation control processing related to the device 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game processing is terminated.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A3202, A3302) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is open (A3401), and if the upper large winning opening is not open (the result of A3401 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening are being processed (A3402). If the upper big winning opening is not being processed for remaining balls (the result of A3402 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the lower big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (A3403). In addition, in the case of the big win state or the small win state, the upper big winning hole and/or the lower big winning hole can be open.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (A3404) when the lower special winning opening is being opened (result of A3403 is "Y"), If there is an input (the result of A3404 is "Y"), a winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening which is added in the current big winning opening switch monitoring process is set to 1 (A3405). If the lower special prize opening is not open (result of A3403 is "N"), or if there is no input to the lower special prize opening switch (result of A3404 is "N"), end the special prize winning opening switch monitoring process. do.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in the process of opening the upper special winning opening (the result of A3401 is "Y"), or if the remaining balls in the upper special winning opening are being processed (the result of A3402 is "Y") ), and the winning counter is set to 0 (A3406). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 of the upper special winning opening switches 39a (A3407), and if there is no input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3407 is "N") ), the process proceeds to step A3411.

The game control device 100, when there is an input to the upper large winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3407 is "Y"), prepares a large winning opening count command as an effect command in order to perform a winning effect (A3408), An effect command setting process is executed (A3409), and the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3410).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (A3411). If there is no input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3411 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3415. If there is an input to the upper large winning opening switch 2 (result of A3411 is "Y"), a large winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3412) in order to perform a winning effect, and the effect command setting process is executed. (A3413), and the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3414).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning counter is 0 (A3415), and if the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3415 is "N"), the process of remaining balls in the big winning opening is in progress. (A3416). If the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3416 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the minor winning remaining ball processing is being performed (A3417). If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3417 is "N"), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2 here) is added to the big winning opening count (A3418).

On the other hand, if the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3415 is "Y"), the game control device 100 is in the process of processing the remaining balls in the big winning opening (the result of A3416 is "Y"), or if the small winning If the ball is being processed (the result of A3417 is "Y"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the large winning hole count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (e.g., 9 in terms of the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (A3419), and determines whether or not the large winning hole count number is less than the upper limit (the result of A3419 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the number of large winning opening counts is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3419 is "Y"), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (A3420), and the target special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (A3421 ).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big win is being opened (A3422), and if the big win is not being opened (the result of A3422 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. If the jackpot is being opened (result of A3422 is "Y"), the value for ending the jackpot opening operation is saved in the jackpot opening control pointer area (A3423), and then the jackpot switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the big winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3208) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can start to vary (A3501). If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game cannot start fluctuation (if the fluctuation cannot be started) (the result of A3501 is "N"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM Save (A3502). It should be noted that here, from the end of the special figure 2 variation display game jackpot variation (during the special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 2 jackpot end processing), and the small of the special figure 2 variation display game From the end of the hit variation (during special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the small hit operation (special figure 2 small hit end processing), the special figure 1 variation display game is not allowed to start variation.

When the special figure 1 variation display game can start varying (the result of A3501 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (A3503). If the left-handed instruction notification command is already prepared as a production command and transmitted to the production control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction has been notified. If the instruction to hit left has been notified (the result of A3503 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3507.

When the game control device 100 has not already notified the left-handed instruction (the result of A3503 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3504), executes the effect command setting process (A3505), and displays. A left-handed instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handed instruction is notified (displayed) by the device 41 or the like is set (A3506).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3507). If the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (the result of A3507 is "Y"), save the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3502). Thereby, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 1 reservations becomes 1 or more.

Game control device 100, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (the result of A3507 is "N"), the variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) as a production command Preparations are made (A3508), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3509). Subsequently, a special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3510). After that, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number as a production command (A3511), and execute production command setting processing (A3512).

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area in RWM (information addition) (A3513). Here, in the special figure status area, during the special figure 1 fluctuation, or (during special figure 1 fluctuation + special figure 2 fluctuation) information will be set. Next, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A3514), and if it is not in a high probability state (if it is in a low probability state) (the result of A3514 is "N"), during the high probability final fluctuation (A3515). Whether or not it is during the high-probability final fluctuation can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag, which will be described later.

If the game control device 100 is not in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3515 is "N"), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A3516), and the special figure 1 fluctuating process transition setting process is executed (A3517 ). It should be noted that the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is used in the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 11).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A3514 is "Y"), or if it is during the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3515 is "Y"), special figure 1 fluctuation check flag Without setting, to execute the special figure 1 process transition setting process during fluctuation (A3517).

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can start to fluctuate (A3601). If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game cannot start fluctuation (if the fluctuation cannot be started) (the result of A3601 is "N"), the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM Save (A3602). In addition, here, from the end of the special figure 1 variation display game jackpot variation (during special figure 1 display processing) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 1 jackpot end processing), and the special figure 1 variation display game small From the end of the hit variation (during special figure 1 display processing) to the end of the small winning operation (special figure 1 small winning end processing), the special figure 2 variation display game cannot start variation.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 pending number is 0 (A3602) when the special figure 2 variation display game can start to fluctuate (the result of A3601 is "Y"). If the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 (the result of A3602 is "N"), prepare a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) as a production command (A3603), An effect command setting process is executed (A3604). Subsequently, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for starting the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3605).

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area in RWM (information addition) (A3606). Here, in the special figure status area, during the special figure 2 fluctuation, or (during special figure 1 fluctuation + special figure 2 fluctuation) information will be set. Next, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A3607), and if it is not in a high probability state (if it is in a low probability state) (the result of A3607 is "N"), during the high probability final fluctuation (A3608). Whether or not it is during the high-probability final fluctuation can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag, which will be described later.

If the game control device 100 is not in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3608 is "N"), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A3609), and the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process is executed (A3610 ). It should be noted that the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is used in the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 11).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A3614 is "Y"), or if it is during the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3615 is "Y"), special figure 2 fluctuation check flag Without setting the special figure 2 during fluctuation processing transition setting processing is executed (A3617).

Game control device 100, if the special figure 2 pending number is 0 (the result of A3602 is "Y"),
It is determined whether the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (A3611). If the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (the result of A3611 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is fluctuating (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed) (A3612). If the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A3612 is "N"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has already started (A3613). If the customer waiting demonstration has not started (the result of A3613 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set (A3614).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3615), and executes effect command setting processing (A3616). The production control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demonstration command can execute the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41. - 特許庁After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3617). Thereby, the special figure 2 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 (the result of A3611 is "N"), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game will be executed, so without preparing the customer waiting demo command, the RWM special The special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is saved in the FIG. 2 game processing number area (A3617). Also, if the special figure 1 is fluctuating (the result of A3612 is "Y"), or if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (the result of A3613 is "Y"), prepare a customer waiting demo command, etc. Instead, save the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3617).

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. Figure 23 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3701). It should be noted that the special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including sorting of look-ahead variation patterns). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process (A3702) for setting deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit, special figure 1 stop pattern (symbol information ) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703), the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game. do.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3705 ). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3706) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation start information setting process for setting the information of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game ( A3707) is executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of winning is in a high probability state (that is, variable probability state) (A3708). If it is not in a high-probability state (the result of A3708 is "N"), it is determined whether it is in a high-probability final fluctuation (A3709). If it is not during the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3709 is "N"), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed) (A3710).

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 is fluctuating (result of A3710 is "Y"), determines whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3711). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3711 is "Y"), that is, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is within the time value of the special figure 2 game processing timer If so, the process proceeds to step A3714.

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3711 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more as a predetermined number of times is determined (A3712). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is less than a predetermined number (here 4) (the result of A3712 is "N"), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated (A3713). The remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated by the value of (the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area + the number of repetitions x 60000 msec).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3714). If the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is greater than or equal to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the result of A3714 is "N"), the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is more special A command for notifying that it is longer than the remaining variable time of the variable display game in FIG. 2 is prepared as an effect command (A3715), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3716). When the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is equal to or longer than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a small hit or the like, the special figure 1 variation display is displayed on the display device 41. There is a possibility that the production related to the game ends suddenly. Therefore, the effect control device 300 that has received the above command sets (changes) the effect related to the decoration special figure 1 variable display game to, for example, not flashy so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, the game control device 100 executes high-probability fluctuation number update processing for updating and managing the number of fluctuations (remaining number) of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high probability state (A3717), and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. exit.

On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (the result of A3708 is "Y"), if it is in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3709 is "Y"), if the special figure 2 is not fluctuating (the result of A3710 is " N"), the process of steps A3711 to A3716 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A3717.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is a predetermined number (here, 4) or more (the result of A3712 is "Y"), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (240 (= 4 × 60) seconds or more here) is longer than the longest variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, so the command to notify that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is longer is not prepared, the process proceeds to step A3717.

Furthermore, the game control device 100, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A3714 is "Y"), the special figure 1 variation display game The process proceeds to step A3717 without preparing a command notifying that the fluctuation time of is longer.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3605) in special figure 2 normal processing will be described. Figure 24 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3801). It should be noted that the special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including sorting of look-ahead variation patterns). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process (A3802) for setting deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, special figure 2 stop pattern (symbol information ) related to the setting special figure 2 stop pattern setting process (A3803), special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game do.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3805 ). Subsequently, the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (A3806) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation start information setting process for setting the information of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game ( A3807), high probability fluctuation number update processing for updating and managing the number of fluctuations (remaining number) of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high probability state (A3808), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3702) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves deviation information in the small hit flag 1 area of RWM (A3901a), and saves deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area of RWM (A3902a). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (A3903a). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 1). After that, the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904a).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big win flag 2 indicates a big win, that is, whether or not the big win information is saved in the big win flag 2 area (A3905a). If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3905a is "N"), a big hit determination process is executed to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the acquired big hit random number value (A3906a ), it is determined whether or not the result of determination is a big hit (A3907a). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907a is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3902a (A3908a), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. Only when the big win flag 2 is not a big win, the big win flag 1 can become a big win (the big win information is saved in the big win flag 1 area), so that the big win flag 1 and the big win flag 2 can be prevented from becoming a big win at the same time. .

If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A3905a is "Y"), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907a is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires Based on the big hit random number value, a small hit determination process for determining whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit is executed (A3909a), and the result of the determination is a small hit or not ( A3910a). In addition, in this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the determination of the small hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). If the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A3910a is "Y"), save the small hit information by overwriting the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3901a (A3911a), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. When the special figure 1 variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910a is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3802) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

In the big hit flag 2 setting process, the "small hit flag 1" in the big hit flag 1 setting process (Fig. 25A) is changed to the "small hit flag 2", the "big hit flag 1" is changed to the "big hit flag 2", and the "big hit flag 2". is replaced with "big hit flag 1", and "special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2", and since the same processing as the big hit flag 1 setting processing is performed, detailed description is omitted. Incidentally, steps A3901b-A3911b in the big hit flag 2 setting process respectively correspond to steps A3901a-A3911a in the big hit flag 1 setting process.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3906a, A3906b) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing and the like will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. It should be noted that the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes performed during the timer interrupt process, and is also performed in step A3103 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A4001), and judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A4002). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A4002 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a loss (other than a jackpot) as the judgment result (A4007), and ends the jackpot judgment processing. do.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A4002 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the probability of occurrence of the hit is in a high probability state (A4003). . Then, if it is in a high probability state (the result of A4003 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value for middle high probability is set (A4004). On the other hand, if it is not in a high probability state (the result of A4003 is "N"), the upper limit determination value for low probability is set (A4005).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A4006). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), the decision result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is "N"), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, the details of the small hit determination processing (A3909a, A3909b) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3107 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit.

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the judgment of the small hit, but the configuration of providing the unique small hit random number is also possible.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the deviation as the judgment result (A4106), and ends the small hit judgment processing. .

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A4101 is "N"), determines whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. (A4102). Then, when the information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4102 is "Y"), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A4103). On the other hand, if the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A4104).

After setting the small hit upper limit determination value, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit determination value (A4105). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4105 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the judgment result (A4106). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4105 is "N"), a small hit is set as the judgment result (A4107). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is terminated.

FIG. 28 shows the big hit probability (probability that the judgment result is a big hit), the small hit probability (the probability that the judgment result is a small hit), and the loss probability (the judgment result is a loss) by the above-mentioned big hit determination process and small hit determination process. Probability) is shown for the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. FIG. 28(a) shows the probabilities in the low-probability state, and FIG. 28(b) shows the probabilities in the high-probability state.

In this embodiment, the jackpot probability (jackpot occurrence probability) is higher in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. Small hit probability (occurrence probability of small hit) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. The loss probability (probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state.

Also, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 2 variation display game. , and the probability of losing is lower than that of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (in the high probability state, the probability of loss of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is 0). Therefore, since winning to the second starting winning port 37 is more advantageous to the player than winning to the first starting winning port 36 (especially with respect to the small hit probability), the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern is only the probability variable pattern, and after the jackpot state (special game state) ends, it becomes a high probability state (probability variable state) without exception, and the probability variable rush rate is 100%. Further, the high probability state continues until a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of variable display games are started after the end of the big win.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 29A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4301a). If the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A4301a is "Y"), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4302a). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (A4303a), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design save area of RWM (A4304a). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305a), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306a). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area of RWM (A4307a), and the big win corresponding to the stop symbol number. Acquire the mouth opening information and save it in the special figure 1 big winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4308a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a. These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4301a is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit, that is, if the small hit flag 1 area contains the small hit information. It is determined whether it has been saved (A4309a). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (the result of A4309a is "Y"), the small hit design random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit design random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (A4310a). Next, a special figure 1 small hit design table is set (A4311a), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design save area (A4312a). This process selects the type of specific result. Subsequently, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4313a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (the result of A4309a is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special figure 1 stop symbol withdrawal area (A4314a), and saves the loss stop symbol pattern. is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4315a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

After steps A4308a, A4313a, and A4315a, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4316a). It should be noted that the stop design pattern is either a missing design, a plurality of jackpot designs (4R probability variation A2, 8R probability variation A3, 16R probability variation A1, 16R probability variation B1-B3), and a small winning pattern (special figure 1 small per) It corresponds. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the decoration special figure 1 command as the production command in the decoration special figure 1 command area (A4317a), and executes the production command setting process (A4318a). A decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319a), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4320a). ), 0 clear (A4321a) the special figure 1 small per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 29B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the "small hit flag 1" in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (Fig. 29A) is changed to the "small hit flag 2", the "big hit flag 1" is changed to the "big hit flag 2", and the " Special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2", and since the same processing as the special figure 1 stop design setting process is performed, detailed description is omitted. Incidentally, steps A4301b-A4321b in the special figure 2 stop design setting process respectively correspond to steps A4301a-A4321a in the special figure 1 stop design setting process.

It should be noted that the stop symbol pattern set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is a lost symbol, a plurality of jackpot symbols (2R probability variation D1, 4R probability variation D3, 8R probability variation E2, 16R probability variation E1, F2, F3), and a plurality of It corresponds to one of the small hit patterns (special figure 2 small hit 1-3). By the above processing, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening 36, and the game ball at the second starting winning opening 37 It constitutes a variable display game executing means for executing a special figure 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4401). If it is not in a high probability state (if it is in a low probability state) (the result of A4401 is "N"), a fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (A4402). Then, the first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 are acquired (A4403).

Here, the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation. The first half variation is the variation mode before the start of the reach, and the second half variation is the variation mode after reaching the reach state and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4404), and if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4404 is "N"). ), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (A4405).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the game control device 100 adds a special figure to the second half offset data in order to distribute the second half variation according to the number of special figure 1 reservations. Add 1 reservation number to update the value (A4406), add the special figure 1 reservation number to the first half offset data to distribute the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 reservation number and convert the value (A4407). If the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a small hit (if it is lost) (the result of A4405 is "N"), the processing of step A4406 is not performed, and the special figure 1 pending number is added only to the first half offset data. Convert the value (A4407).

If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A4404 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A4405 to A4407, and uses the first half offset data and second half offset data acquired in step A4403. The process proceeds to step A4412 without updating or converting the data.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A4401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4408). If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4408 is "N"), set the first half offset data for the special figure 1 loss/small hit at the time of high probability (A4409), and process step A4411 transition to When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A4408 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the special figure 1 big hit at high probability is set (A4410). Subsequently, the second half offset data for long-time variation of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A4411). As a result, in the high probability state, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a long-time variation. In addition, even if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a long fluctuation (long fluctuation), unlike the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, 9 is not saved in the repetition number area, so special figure 1 The long fluctuation (long fluctuation) of the fluctuation display game is shorter than the long fluctuation (long fluctuation) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

After steps A4404, A4407, or A4411, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the RWM fluctuation distribution information 1 area (A4412), and saves the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution Information 2) is saved in the RWM fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A4413), and the special figure 1 information setting process is terminated.

[Tokuzu 2 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4501). If it is in a high probability state (the result of A4501 is "N"), the variation pattern selection information table is set (A4502). Then, the first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 are acquired (A4503). The first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state) (the result of A4501 is "N"), it determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (A4504). . If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4504 is "N"), set the first half offset data for the special figure 2 loss/small hit at the time of low probability (A4505), and the processing of step A4507 transition to When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A4504 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at the time of low probability is set (A4506). Subsequently, the second half offset data for long-time variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A4507). Thereby, in the low probability state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a long fluctuation (long fluctuation).

After step A4503 or A4507, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the RWM fluctuation distribution information 1 area (A4508), and saves the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2). Save to the fluctuation distribution information 2 area of RWM (A4509), and end the special figure 2 information setting process.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3706) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the fluctuation group address table (A4601), acquires and prepares the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 (A4602), and the fluctuation pattern random number of special figure 1 A fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded as a random number from the 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (A4603).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a loss (A4604). If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is lost (the result of A4604 is "Y"), execute 2-byte distribution processing based on the variation pattern random number 1 (A4605), and the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is lost If not (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604 is "N"), a sorting process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606).

The structure of the second-half variation group table is different for winning and for losing. The size of the random number for distribution is 1 byte for winning and 2 bytes for losing. The size of the hit is set to 1 byte in order to save the data capacity, but since the appearance rate of the hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, even 1 byte is sufficient. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big win or a small win), only the lower value of the variation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605 or A4606, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the allocation (A4607). Subsequently, load the variation pattern random number 2 as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608), and execute the sorting process based on the variation pattern random number 2 (A4609) . Then, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is obtained and saved in the second half variation number area (A4610). Through the above processing, the second half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4611), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation allocation information 1 and the second half variation number (A4612). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4613). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of special figure 1 is prepared by loading the fluctuation pattern random number 3 as a random number (A4614), and the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4616), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. By the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (A3806) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the second half variation selection address table (A4701), acquires the address of the second half variation selection table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2, and prepares it (A4702). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is prepared as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 (A4703), and the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4704). Then, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (A4705). Through the above processing, the second half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4706), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (A4707). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4708). Furthermore, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of the special figure 2 (A4709), and the sorting process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4710).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of being distributed, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4711), and ends the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. By the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4605) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the second half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A4801), It is determined whether or not the code is for no sorting (A4802).

Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, but the second half that defines only the second half fluctuation pattern group in which the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" Since there is no need for sorting in the variation group table (for example, some variation group tables when the result is a loss), a sorting value of "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting, is defined at the top. .

Then, the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the result of allocation when the top data of the second half variation group table is a code without allocation (the result of A4802 is "Y") (A4807). ), ending the 2-byte allocation process.

On the other hand, if the head data of the second half fluctuation group table is not a code of no sorting (the result of A4802 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines one sorting value initially specified in the second half fluctuation group table. (A4803).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value obtained in the process of step A4803 from the random number (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) loaded in the process of step A4603 of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. A new random number value is calculated (A4804). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4805).

When the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4805 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the next sorting value (A4806), and then performs the processing after step A4803. to run. That is, the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is obtained (A4803), the determined random value in the process of step A4805 is used as a new random value, and the distribution value is subtracted. is calculated (A4804). Then, each process is executed for the calculated new random number value until it is determined in step A4805 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4805 is "Y"). As a result, any one second half variation selection table is selected from at least one second half variation selection table defined in the second half variation group table.

Then, when the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4805 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result (A4807), and 2 bytes End the sorting process.

[Distribution process]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (A4606, A4609, A4615, A4704, A4710) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sorting processing. In the sorting process, the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game and selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3 is.

The game control device 100, first, the first data of the prepared second half variation group table (selection table), second half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without sorting (that is, " 0”) (A4901), and it is determined whether or not it is a code without sorting (A4902).

Here, like the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern and first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table with no sorting, a sorting value of "0", that is, a code for no sorting is specified at the head.

Then, if the leading data of the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is a code without sorting (the result of A4902 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines the sorting result. The address of the corresponding data is updated (A4907), and the sorting process ends.

On the other hand, if the leading data of the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is not a code without sorting (the result of A4902 is "N"), the game control device 100, the second half variation group table, One sorting value initially specified in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is acquired (A4903).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates a new random number value by subtracting the sorting value obtained in step A4903 from the loaded random number value (variation pattern random number values 1 to 3) (A4904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4905).

If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the next sorting value (A4906), and executes the processing after step A4903. Execute. That is, the distribution values specified next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are acquired (A4903), and the random number determined in step A4905 is used as a new random number, and the distribution value is set. Subtraction is performed, and a new random number value is calculated (A4904). Then, it is executed until it is determined that the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one of the second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the second half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table.

Then, when the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the result of sorting (A4907), and performs the sorting process. exit.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (A5001). If the information is set for the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 1 used is cleared (A5002 ). If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A5001 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, so the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to 3 of the special figure 2 used Clear the storage area (A5003).

After steps A5002 and A5003, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation time value table (A5004), and acquires the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number (A5005). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A5006), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is obtained (A5007).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value (A5008), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5009). Subsequently, it is determined whether information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (A5010). If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A5010 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, so the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (long fluctuation) (A5011).

If the game control device 100 does not start the long variation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the result of A5011 is "N"), 0 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5012), and the special figure When the long variation of the 2 variation display game is started (the result of A5011 is "Y"), 9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5013). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variable display game, in order to change the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not enough with a 2-byte timer, the predetermined number of repetitions (here, 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to the number of repetitions. set in the area. In timer interrupt processing with an interrupt period of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, when a timer of 60000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above-mentioned addition value to the special game processing timer area, and the number of repetitions of 9 times is saved, timer interrupt processing (especially, special figure 2 In game processing (FIG. 19)), the timer is decremented (A3303), and when the time is up (the result of A3304 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 (A3306), and the game processing timer is set to a long fluctuation timer. A value of 60000ms (60 seconds) is set. As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game of long variation can be a long variation time of 60000 msec + (60000 msec x 9) = 10 minutes.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when it is not a long fluctuation (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5009 It is the sum of the time value and the second half fluctuation time value.

The game control device 100 proceeds to step A5014 without setting the number of repetitions of the timer when information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5010 is "Y").

After steps A5010, A5012 and A5013, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5014) and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5015). . Then, an effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as the effect command is executed (A5016).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (A5017). If the information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is "Y"), the special figure 1 pending number is updated by -1 (A5018), and the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 1 variable display game is shifted (A5019), and the free space after the shift is cleared (A5020). If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so without shifting the contents of the random number storage area (special figure 1 (because the number of reservations is 1), the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Variation commands including information about patterns are mentioned, and these commands are sent to the production control device 300 . In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[High-probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high probability fluctuation count update process (A3717, A3808) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the procedure of high probability variation frequency update processing. In the high-probability fluctuation number update process, the number of fluctuations of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high-probability state (here, the number of high-probability fluctuations as the number of remaining fluctuations) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A5101). If it is not in the high probability state (if it is in the low probability state) (the result of A5101 is "N"), the high probability fluctuation frequency update process is terminated.

When the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, it becomes a low probability state (it can be set to a low probability state by the fanfare/interval process transition setting process described later). That is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, not only the special figure 1 variation display game but also the special figure 2 variation display game is executed in a low probability state, and when the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, especially Not only the FIG. 2 variation display game but also the special figure 1 variation display game are executed in a low probability state. In addition, if the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, there is a possibility of a high probability state, and the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are in a high probability state. may be executed.

If the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A5101 is "Y"), the high probability fluctuation count indicating the remaining number of special figure fluctuation display games to be started in the high probability state is updated by -1 (1 is subtracted) (A5102). In addition, the initial value of the number of high probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high probability state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process described later) ). Also, even if any of the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game starts to fluctuate, the high probability variation frequency is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A5103). When the high probability variation count is not 0 (the result of A5103 is "N"), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the high probability variation count update process is terminated. If the number of times of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (result of A5103 is "Y"), the signal related to the end of high-probability (off data of 2 jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area of RWM (A5104). Furthermore, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (A5105). Signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are, for example, off data of special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 2 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation This is OFF data of the time shortening state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the RWM gaming state display number area (A5106), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM ( A5107), to set the high probability final variation flag corresponding to the pattern (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start the variation (A5108), and end the high probability variation number update process.

Note that the high-probability final fluctuation flag is information for indicating that the fluctuation started during a high probability even if the probability is currently low. In the high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation), if the probability is not lowered to low probability immediately after the fluctuation starts, the hit judgment due to the start-up winning during this final fluctuation will be performed with high probability. Therefore, the hit probability is set to a low probability by the special low probability & no time saving flag at the start of the fluctuation of the high probability final fluctuation. Therefore, a high probability final change flag is set and used to determine whether it is a high probability final change (eg, in steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A3709, etc.). In addition, the high probability final variation flag also includes information that can determine whether it is a high probability final variation of special figure 1 or special figure 2.

As described above, after the big win, the high probability state is maintained until a predetermined number of times (the initial value of the number of high probability fluctuations, for example, 50 times) the variation display game is started, and the number of high probability fluctuations becomes 0 and the predetermined number of times is reached. When the eye change display game (high probability final change) is started, a special low probability & no time saving flag is set, the low probability state ends and the time saving state ends, and a high probability final change flag is set.

[Special figure 1 change process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process shift setting process (A3517) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 38A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process.

First, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the processing number to shift to the special figure 1 fluctuating process (A5201a), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5202a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (A5203a), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 1 (ON data of the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5204a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A5205a). Subsequently, save the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the flashing control timer (for example, 100 msec) in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (Blinking period timer of the special figure 1 indicator 51) (A5206a), special figure 1 fluctuating pattern number area (A5207a) to save the initial value (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting pattern) of the pattern number during fluctuation (A5207a), and end the process transition setting process during special figure 1 fluctuation.

[Special figure 2 change process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (A3610) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 38B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process.

The special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process is the special figure 1 fluctuation process transition setting process (Fig. 38A) in which "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) is replaced with "special figure 2" (special symbol 2) , and since the same processing as the processing shift setting processing during special figure 1 fluctuation is performed, detailed description is omitted. It should be noted that steps A5201b-A5207b in the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process respectively correspond to steps A5201a-A5207a in the special figure 1 fluctuation process transition setting process.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuating process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 during fluctuation processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of output times of symbol determination by +1 (A5301). The output number of times of symbol determination is used in the later-described symbol determination number signal editing process. Next, the decoration special figure 1 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area, prepared as production command (A5302), production command setting processing is executed (A5303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (high-probability final variation) (A5306). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation frequency updating process, it can be determined that the final fluctuation is high-probability fluctuation. If the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation (the result of A5306 is "Y"), the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern as the display time (stop display time) of the special figure 1 stop symbol The corresponding display time is set (A5307). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a winning symbol of special figure 1, 2000 msec if it is a big hit symbol of special figure 1, and 136 msec if it is a small winning symbol of special figure 1. be.

When the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is not the high probability final variation (the result of A5306 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the display time for the high probability final variation as the special figure 1 display time. (A5308). For example, the display time for the high-probability final change is 7000 msec.

After steps A5307 and A5308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a loss (A5309). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is lost (the result of A5309 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is changed to the special figure 1 stop symbol It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop design area (A5324).

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not lost (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A5309 is "N"), the special figure 2 is also fluctuating (the special figure 2 variation display game is also execution) (A5310). If the special figure 2 is not fluctuating (the result of A5310 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5320. If the special figure 2 is also fluctuating (the result of A5310 is "Y"), it is determined whether the later-described special figure 2 displaying process is in progress (A5311).

The game control device 100 moves to the process of step A5313 when the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5311 is "Y"). If the special figure 2 displaying process is not being executed (the result of A5311 is "N"), +1 is updated to the design fixed number of times output number (A5312). Subsequently, set the display time of the value obtained by adding 4msec to the display time of special figure 1 as the display time of special figure 2 (display time of special figure 1 + 4msec) (A5313), and display it in the special figure 2 game processing timer area Save time (A5314). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason for adding 4msec is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 2 game process (subtraction of 4msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) (A3303), which is added extra. Thereby, the actual display time of the stop pattern of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop pattern of the special figure 2 can be made the same. In addition, if you have already started the stop display of special figure 2, the display time will be reset here (basically the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the losing pattern command of the decoration special figure 2 as an effect command (A5315), and executes the effect command setting process (A5316). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5317), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5318). After that, special figure 2 displaying processing shift setting processing 2 to set for executing special figure 2 displaying processing is executed (A5319).

By the processing of steps A5313 to A5319, in the special figure 1 fluctuation process which is the control related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is set. , Execution of processing during special figure 2 display (end of special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (during the special figure 2 variation), if the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 2 variation display game will be forcibly terminated (forcibly terminated) due to a deviation result.

It should be noted that the special figure 1 variable process, when the fluctuation time ends, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5009) times up (of A3204 Since the result is "Y"), when the special figure 1 variation display game of the winning result stops variation, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special figure 1 command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saves it in the winning design command area (A5320). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (A5321). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5321 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern setting process (stop pattern number at the time of a small hit) is saved in the special figure 1 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a small hit (if it is a big hit) (the result of A5321 is "N"), the game control device 100 changes the number of rounds from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area to the round number upper limit. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5322),
The special prize opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 1 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5323). After that, the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324). Next, the special figure 1 display during processing transition setting processing 1 which sets for executing the special figure 1 display processing is executed (A5325), and the special figure 1 changing processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variation display game (during the variation of the special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variation display game results in a winning result, the special figure 2 variation display game is lost. It constitutes a forced termination means that forcibly terminates with the result.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation process.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of output times of design determination by +1 (A5401). The output number of times of symbol determination is used in the later-described symbol determination number signal editing process. Then, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepared as a production command (A5402), and the production command setting process is executed (A5403). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (high-probability final variation) (A5406). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation frequency updating process, it can be determined that the final fluctuation is high-probability fluctuation. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is not a high probability final variation (the result of A5406 is "N"), it corresponds to the special figure 2 stop pattern pattern as the display time (stop display time) of the special figure 2 stop pattern The display time to be displayed is set (A5407). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is the winning symbol of special figure 2, 600 msec if the big hit symbol of special figure 2, and 600 msec if the small winning symbol of special figure 2. be. In addition, the display time of the winning design of the special figure 2, the big hit design, and the small hit design is the same.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5406 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation as the display time of the special figure 2. (A5408). For example, the display time for the high-probability final change is 7000 msec.

After steps A5407 and A5408, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a loss (A5409). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is lost (the result of A5409 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop design setting process (stop design number at the time of loss) is set to the special figure 2 stop design It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop design area (A5424).

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not lost (the result of A5410 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure 1 is also fluctuating (the special figure 1 variation display game is also being executed). is determined (A5410). When special figure 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A5410 is "N"), it moves to the processing of step A5420. If the special figure 1 is also fluctuating (the result of A5410 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 displaying process described later is being executed (A5411).

The game control device 100 moves to the process of step A5413 when the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5411 is "Y"). If the special figure 1 displaying process is not in execution (the result of A5411 is "N"), +1 is updated to the design fixed number of times output number (A5412). Subsequently, set the display time of the value (display time of special figure 2 + 4msec) obtained by adding 4msec to the display time of special figure 2 as the display time of special figure 1 (A5413), and display it in the special figure 1 game processing timer area Save time (A5414). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason for adding 4msec is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 1 game process (subtraction of 4msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) (A3203), which is added extra. Thereby, the display time of the stop design of the actual special figure 2 and the display time of the stop design of the special figure 1 can be made the same. In addition, if you have already started the stop display of special figure 1, the display time will be reset here (basically the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the losing pattern command of the decoration special figure 1 as a production command (A5415), and executes production command setting processing (A5416). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5417), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5418). After that, special figure 1 displaying process shift setting processing 2 to set for executing the special figure 1 displaying process is executed (A5419).

By the processing of steps A5413 to A5419, in the special figure 2 fluctuation processing which is the control related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is set. , Execution of processing during special figure 1 display (end of special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (during the special figure 1 variation), if the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 1 variation display game will be forcibly terminated (execution terminated) as a result of deviation.

It should be noted that the special figure 2 fluctuation process, when the fluctuation time ends, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3304 and A3305 is executed in "Y"), when the special figure 2 variation display game of the hit result stops variation, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly ended in variation (execution end).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special figure 2 command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saves it in the winning design command area (A5420). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit (A5421). If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (the result of A5421 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern setting process (stop pattern number at the time of a small hit) is saved in the special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (if it is a big hit) (the result of A5421 is "N"), the game control device 100 changes the round number upper limit from the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5422),
The special prize opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5423). After that, the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424). Next, execute the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1 to set for executing the special figure 2 displaying process (A5425), and end the special figure 2 changing process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variation display game (during the special figure 1 variation), if the special figure 2 variation display game results in a winning result, the special figure 1 variation display game is lost. It constitutes a forced termination means that forcibly terminates with the result.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1 (A5325) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 41A is a flow chart showing a procedure of processing shift setting processing 1 during special figure 1 display.

First, the game control device 100 sets "2" as the processing number in order to shift to the special figure 1 displaying process (A5501a), saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5502a), A signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 (off data of signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503a).

Next, the game control device 100, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, sets the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 indicator 51 to the special figure 1 variation control flag Save to the area (A5504a), to end the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 display.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the processing shift setting process 1 (A5425) during special figure 2 display in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 display.

The game control device 100 first sets "2" as the processing number to shift to the special figure 2 displaying process (A5501b), saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5502b), A signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 (off data of signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503b).

Next, the game control device 100, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 special figure 2 fluctuation control flag Save in the area (A5504b), and end the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 display.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the processing shift setting process 2 (A5419) during special figure 1 display in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 42A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, information setting is performed when the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly terminated due to the hit of the special figure 2 variation display game.

First, the game control device 100 sets "2" as the processing number in order to shift to the special figure 1 displaying process (A5601a), saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5602a), A signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603a). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (A5604a ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the lost stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605a), clears the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (A5606a), and special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area. is cleared (A5607a). Furthermore, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (A5608a), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A5609a). Subsequently, the special figure 1 stop design save area is cleared (A5610a), and the loss stop design number (stop design number at the time of loss) is saved in the special figure 1 stop design area (A5611a). By the above processing, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 becomes a fluctuation stop (variation end) with the stop symbol of the loss.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 (A5319) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 42B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 2 display. In the special figure 2 display process shift setting process 2, information setting is performed when the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly terminated due to the hit of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 first sets "2" as the processing number to shift to the special figure 2 displaying process (A5601b), saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5602b), A signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603b). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (A5604b ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the lost stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605b), clears the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (A5606b), and special figure 2 big winning opening opening information area. is cleared (A5607b). Furthermore, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A5608b), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A5609b). Subsequently, the special figure 2 stop design save area is cleared (A5610b), and the loss stop design number (stop design number at the time of loss) is saved in the special figure 2 stop design area (A5611b). By the above processing, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 becomes a fluctuation stop (variation end) with the stop symbol of the deviation.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. 43A and 43B are flowcharts showing the procedure of special figure 1 displaying process. FIG. 43A shows the first half of the special figure 1 displaying process, and FIG. 43B shows the second half of the special figure 1 displaying process.

The game control device 100 first loads the small hit flag 1 (indicating small hit information or loss information) from the small hit flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the small hit flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, the big win flag 1 (indicating big win information or losing information) is loaded from the big win flag 1 area (A5703), and the big win flag 1 area is cleared (A5704). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5705).

If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 big win in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5706 ). For example, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 jackpot is the ON data of the conditional device operating signal, the ON data of the character product continuous operating device operating signal, and the ON data of the special symbol 1 winning signal. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5708).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the round number upper limit table (A5709), and sets the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit table. It is obtained and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (A5710). Note that the upper limit of the number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information of the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is obtained from the round number upper limit table and saved in the RWM round LED pointer area (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5712), and executes the effect command setting process (A5713). In addition, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this winning design command corresponds to a big winning design. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5714), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5715).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the big winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the probability state in the external information output data area (A5716). The signals here are, for example, a big win 2 signal and a big win 3 signal that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on for a jackpot other than 2R, turned on for a high-probability 2R jackpot, turned off for a low-probability 2R jackpot, and a jackpot 3 signal turned on for a jackpot other than 2R, with a high probability. Turns off with a medium 2R jackpot, and turns on with a low probability medium 2R jackpot.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (A5717), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5718). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot of opening the upper big winning opening based on the big winning opening opening information (A5719).

If the game control device 100 is a big hit with the opening of the upper special winning opening (the result of A5719 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the upper special winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5720), and the RWM upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period. A non-fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the flag area (A5721), and "3" is set as the processing number to shift to fanfare/interval processing (A5724). If it is not a big hit when the upper big winning opening is opened (the result of A5719 is "N"), clear the lower big winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5722), and put the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5723), and "3" is set as the processing number to shift to fanfare/interval processing (A5724).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5725), executes fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (A5726), and ends the special figure 1 displaying processing. .

On the other hand, if the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (the result of A5705 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 1. Whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 1 is a small hit) is determined (A5727). When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A5727 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (A5728). If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed this time is a high probability final fluctuation (result of A5728 is "Y"), prepare a probability information command (low probability) as a production command (A5729), and execute production command setting processing (A5730).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area for recovery from power failure of RWM (A5731), and clears the left hitting instruction notification flag (A5732). The transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery. After that, the winning symbol command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5734). In addition, since the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit, this winning design command corresponds to a small winning design. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 variation display game of this time is not the high probability final variation (the result of A5728 is "N"), the game control device 100 does not process steps A5729 to A5732, and selects the winning symbol from the winning symbol command area. A command is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5734).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small winning fanfare command as a production command (A5735), and executes production command setting processing (A5736). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A5737). If it is not a high probability state (the result of A5737 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5738), indicating that it is right-handed. In order to turn off the second gaming state display section 56 (lamps D8-D10) to notify, the number in the left-hand hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area of RWM (A5739). If it is in a high-probability state (the result of A5737 is "Y"), the signal related to the right-handed instruction (ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5740), indicating that it is right-handed. In order to light up the second game state display section 56 (lamps D8 to D10) for informing the player, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5741).

After steps A5739 and A5741, the game control device 100 clears the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5742), saves the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5743), Execute special figure 1 small per fanfare middle process shift setting process (A5744), and end the special figure 1 display process.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a small hit (if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit) (the result of A5727 is "N"), that is, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game If the result of is lost, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (A5745). If it is not a high-probability final change (the result of A5745 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5753.

If the game control device 100 is a high probability final variation (the result of A5745 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5746), and executes the effect command setting process (A5747). . Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5748), and the left hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (A5749). After that, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A5750). If it is a small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5750 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A5753.

If the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5750 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5751). Subsequently, in order to extinguish the second game state display section 56 (lamps D8 to D10) for notifying that the player is in the right-handed state, the number indicating the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5752). , Clear the special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5753). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is lost, the special figure 1 normal processing transition setting process 1 is executed (A5754), and the special figure 1 displaying process is ended. In the special figure 1 normal processing transition setting process 1, "0" is set as the processing number to switch to the special figure 1 normal processing, and processing such as saving the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area is performed.

[Special figure 2 display process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. Figures 44A and 44B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the process during special figure 2 display. FIG. 44A shows the first half of the special figure 2 displaying process, and FIG. 44B shows the latter half of the special figure 2 displaying process.

The game control device 100 first loads the small hit flag 2 (indicating small hit information or loss information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801), and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Subsequently, the big win flag 2 (indicating big win information or losing information) is loaded from the big win flag 2 area (A5803), and the big win flag 2 area is cleared (A5804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5805 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big win in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806 ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 jackpot is the ON data of the conditional device operating signal, the ON data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the ON data of the special symbol 2 winning signal. Subsequently, special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is prepared as production command (A5807), production command setting processing is executed (A5808).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the round number upper limit table (A5809), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit table It is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of RWM (A5810). Note that the upper limit of the number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information of the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is obtained from the round number upper limit table and saved in the RWM round LED pointer area (A5811).

Next, the game control device 100 loads a winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5812), and executes effect command setting processing (A5813). In addition, since the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big win, this winning design command corresponds to a big winning design. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5814), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5815).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability in the external information output data area (A5816). The signals here are, for example, a big win 2 signal and a big win 3 signal that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on for a jackpot other than 2R, turned on for a high-probability 2R jackpot, turned off for a low-probability 2R jackpot, and a jackpot 3 signal turned on for a jackpot other than 2R, with a high probability. Turns off with a medium 2R jackpot, and turns on with a low probability medium 2R jackpot.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (A5817), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5818). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big win of opening the upper big winning opening based on the big winning opening opening information (A5819).

If the game control device 100 is a big hit with the upper special winning opening open (the result of A5819 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the upper special winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5820), and the RWM upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period. A flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area (A5821), and "3" is set as the processing number to shift to fanfare/interval processing (A5824). If it is not a big hit when the upper big winning opening is opened (the result of A5819 is "N"), clear the lower big winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5822), and put the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5823), and "3" is set as the processing number to shift to fanfare/interval processing (A5824).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5825), executes fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (A5826), and ends the special figure 2 displaying processing. .

On the other hand, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (the result of A5805 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2. Whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) is determined (A5827). If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A5827 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (A5828). If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time is a high probability final fluctuation (result of A5828 is "Y"), prepare a probability information command (low probability) as a production command (A5829), and execute production command setting processing (A5830).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area for recovery from power failure of RWM (A5831), and clears the left hitting instruction notification flag (A5832). After that, the winning symbol command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5834). In addition, since the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, this hit design command corresponds to a small hit design. On the other hand, if the current special figure 2 variation display game is not the high probability final variation (the result of A5828 is "N"), the game control device 100 does not process steps A5829 to A5832, and issues a command from the winning symbol command area. A hit pattern is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5834).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small winning fanfare command as an effect command (A5835), and executes effect command setting processing (A5836). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A5837). If it is not a high probability state (the result of A5837 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838), indicating that it is right-handed. In order to extinguish the second game state display section 56 (lamps D8 to D10) for notification, the number in the left-hand hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5839). If it is in a high probability state (the result of A5837 is "Y"), the signal related to the right-handed instruction (ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5840), and it is right-handed. In order to light up the second game state display section 56 (lamps D8 to D10) for informing the player, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5841).

After steps A5839 and A5841, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a small win to open the upper big winning opening (A5842). If it is a small hit that opens the upper big winning opening (the result of A5842 is "Y"), clear the upper big winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5843), and the fraud monitoring period in the upper big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area Save the outside flag (A5844), execute the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (A5847), and end the special figure 2 display process. If it is not a small win to open the upper big winning hole (the result of A5842 is "N"), that is, if it is a small win to open the lower big winning hole, the lower big winning hole illegal winning number area is cleared (A5845). , Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5846), execute the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (A5847), and end the special figure 2 display process .

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a small hit (if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5827 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game If the result of is lost, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (A5848). If it is not a high-probability final change (the result of A5848 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5856.

If the game control device 100 is a high probability final variation (the result of A5848 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5849), and executes the effect command setting process (A5850). . Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5851), and the left hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (A5852). After that, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit state of the special figure 1 variation display game (A5853). If it is a small hit state of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A5853 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A5856.

If the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A5853 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5854). Subsequently, in order to extinguish the second game state display section 56 (lamps D8 to D10) for notifying that the player is in the right-handed state, the number indicating the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5855). , To clear the special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5856). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 2 normal processing transition setting process 1 is executed (A5857), and the special figure 2 displaying process is ended. In the special figure 2 normal processing transition setting process 1, "0" is set as the processing number in order to transition to the special figure 2 normal processing, and processing such as saving the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area is performed.

[Fanfare/In-interval processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (A5726, A5826) in the special figure 1 display process and the special figure 2 display process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the fanfare/interval process transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the signal related to the start of the jackpot (ON data of the jackpot 1 signal) in the external information output data area (A5901), and saves the signal related to the end of the high probability & short time in the test signal output data area. (A5902), and clears the round number area for managing the number of rounds in the RWM (A5903).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A5904), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5905). By setting the special low probability & no time saving flag, the probability of hitting will be low and it will be in a state of no time saving (no time saving state). Subsequently, save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5906), high probability to hold the number of high probability fluctuations in the RWM Clear the probability fluctuation count area (A5907).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the big hit information in the special figure status area (A5908), and clears the high probability final variation flag area holding the high probability final variation flag in the RWM (A5909). Subsequently, a signal (ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5910), and the second game state display section 56 (lamp D8 -D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5911).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (A5912), and stores the special figure 2 abnormal number area that holds the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number in the RWM. 0 clear (A5913), 0 clear special figure 1 fluctuation count area holding special figure 1 fluctuation number in RWM (A5914), special figure 2 abnormality holding value of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer in RWM The fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (A5915), and the fanfare/interval process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing (A5744) during the special figure 1 small hit fanfare in the special figure 1 displaying process will be described. FIG. 46A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small-hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process.

First, the game control device 100 sets "7" as the processing number in order to shift to processing during the small winning fanfare (A6001a), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6002a). Subsequently, the small win fanfare time (for example, 4 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6003a), and the signal related to the start of the small win (on data of the big win 1 signal) is saved in the external information output data area. (A6004a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the special figure 1 small hit (on data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A6005a), and saves it in the special figure status area. Save the information (A6006a). Furthermore, the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6007a), and the process transition setting process during the special figure 1 small hit fanfare is ended.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process shift setting process (A5847) during the special figure 2 small hit fanfare in the special figure 2 display process will be described. FIG. 46B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process during the special figure 2 small hit fanfare.

In the special figure 2 small winning fanfare intermediate processing transition setting process, "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) in the special figure 1 small winning fanfare medium process transition setting process (Fig. 46A) is changed to "special figure 2" (special symbol 2). , and since the same processing as the processing transition setting processing during the special figure 1 small fanfare is performed, detailed description will be omitted. It should be noted that steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process respectively correspond to steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process (A3211, A3314) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the procedure of fanfare/interval processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A6101). In addition, since the number of rounds is set to 0 in the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (A5903), it is set to 0 before the start of this big hit operation. Thereafter, a round command corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6102), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 sets an initial value of the jackpot process control pointer corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6104), and saves it in the jackpot process control pointer area of RWM (A6105). Here, in the case of a pattern that repeats the opening and closing of the big winning opening during one round, set 0 as the initial value, and in the case of the pattern of opening the big winning opening only once during one round, the initial value is the upper limit. Set a value (=21). In the case of a pattern that repeats opening and closing, the initial value does not have to be 0, but may be a value greater than 0 and less than the upper limit value (that is, starting from an intermediate value). Alternatively, one of the upper and lower special prize openings may be repeatedly opened and closed, and the other may be opened only once, or both the upper and lower special prize openings may be opened and closed. It is good also as a pattern which repeats or a pattern which opens only once.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6106). Subsequently, "4" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (A6107), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6108). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A6108 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6109), and the special figure 1 game processing of the big winning opening opening time Save in the timer area (A6110). If the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6108 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6111), and the special figure 2 game processing timer for the special figure 2 game processing time Save to area (A6112).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big win to open the upper big winning opening based on the big winning opening opening information (A6113). If it is a big hit to open the upper big winning opening (result of A6113 is "Y"), the big winning opening opening processing shift setting processing 1 is executed (A6114), and the fanfare/interval processing ends. If it is not a big win that opens the upper big winning hole (the result of A6113 is "N"), that is, if it is a big win that opens the lower big winning hole, the process shift setting process 2 during opening the big winning hole is executed (A6115). , ends the fanfare/interval process. In the present embodiment, there are two types of jackpots: one that opens only the upper big winning opening and one that opens only the lower big winning opening. Configurations are also possible.

[Process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the big winning opening]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing 1 (A6114) during the opening of the big winning opening in the fanfare/interval processing will be described. FIG. 48A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the big winning opening.

The game control device 100 saves the signal (ON data of the special electric accessory 1 in operation signal) related to the opening of the upper big winning opening in the test signal output data area (A6201a), and saves it in the RWM big winning opening solenoid output data area. , Save the upper large winning opening ON data for turning on the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (A6202a), clear the large winning opening count number (A6203a), and end the processing transition setting processing 1 during the opening of the large winning opening.

[Process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big winning opening]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process 2 (A6115) during the opening of the big winning opening in the fanfare/interval process will be described. FIG. 48B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big winning opening.

The game control device 100 saves the signal (ON data of the special electric accessory 2 in operation signal) related to the opening of the lower grand prize opening in the test signal output data area (A6201b), and stores it in the RWM big prize opening solenoid output data area. , Save the lower special winning opening ON data for turning on the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b (A6202b), clear the large winning opening count number (A6203b), and end the processing transition setting processing 1 during the opening of the large winning opening.

[Processing during the opening of the big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the processing (A3212, A3315) during the opening of the special prize opening in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the processing during opening of the big winning opening.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the process control pointer during the jackpot (A6301), and determines whether or not the value of the loaded process control pointer during the jackpot is equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (for example, 21). (A6302). When the value of the big-hit process control pointer is less than the big-hit operation end value (the result of A6302 is "N"), the big-hit process control pointer is updated by +1 (A6303), and the process according to the big-hit process control pointer is performed. Operation transition setting processing is executed (A6304), and the processing during opening of the big winning opening is ended.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the current round is the final round when the value of the big-hit process control pointer is equal to or greater than the big-hit operation end value (A6302 result is "Y"). If the number of rounds (A6101) updated by +1 in the fanfare/interval process is the final round number (eg 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R), it can be determined to be the final round.

If it is not the final round (the result of A6305 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares an interval command as an effect command (A6306), and executes effect command setting processing (A6308). If it is the final round (the result of A6305 is "Y"), an ending command is prepared as an effect command (A6307), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6308).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information (A6309), and sets "5" as the processing number to shift to the large winning opening remaining ball processing (A6310). ). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A6311). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6311 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6312), and the remaining ball processing time is a special figure 1 game processing timer Save in area (A6313). If the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6311 is "N"), save this processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6314), and save the remaining ball processing time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6315).

After steps A6313 and A6315, the game control device 100 saves off data in the output data area for the large winning opening solenoid in order to turn off both the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (A6316), The processing during the opening of the big winning opening is ended.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit operation transition setting process (A6304) in the big winning opening opening process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit operation transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first branches by the process control pointer during the big hit (A6401). It is also possible to use the value before updating +1 in step A6303 instead of the current value for the process control pointer during the big hit. If the value of the big-hit process control pointer is an even number, a wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the big-hit process control pointer is set (A6402), and the OFF data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A6403).

When the value of the process control pointer during the big win is an odd number, the game control device 100 sets the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the process control pointer during the big win (A6404). For example, the big winning opening opening time is 200 msec when the jackpot middle processing control pointer is 1 to 19 (jackpot middle processing control pointer = 1 to 19), and the jackpot middle processing control pointer is 21 (big hit middle processing control pointer = 21). is 25000 msec. The 200 msec opening time of the big winning opening is used in the case of a pattern in which the opening and closing of the big winning opening for a short period of time are repeated during one round. Subsequently, the upper large winning opening ON data for turning on the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A6405). As a result, the upper special winning opening can be repeatedly opened and closed for a short period of time. In addition, here, when the lower special prize opening repeats opening and closing for a short time, the lower special prize opening ON data is saved in the large prize opening solenoid output data area, or the lower special prize opening ON data and the upper special prize opening A configuration in which both data are saved is also possible.

After steps A6403 and A6405, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A6406). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6406 is "Y"), the set time (wait time or big winning opening opening time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6407). If the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A6406 is "N"), that is, if the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6408 ).

[Large prize mouth residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (A3213, A3316) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big winning hole remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6501). If it is not the final round (the result of A6501 is "N"), the test signal output of the signal related to the end of the opening of the big winning opening (off data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) Save in the data area (A6502), set the interval time corresponding to the big winning mouth opening information and the number of rounds (A6503), and set "3" as the processing number to shift to fanfare/interval processing (A6504) ). As a result, the fanfare/interval processing, the large winning opening open processing, and the large winning opening remaining ball processing are repeated until the final round is reached. The interval period between the rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the processing time for the balls remaining in the big winning opening and the interval time.

When the game control device 100 is the final round (the result of A6501 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the jackpot end processing transition setting process for shifting to the jackpot end processing (A6505), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. is set (A6506), and "6" is set as the processing number (A6507). As a result, it is possible to shift to the jackpot ending process. The length of the ending period is the sum of the ending time and the remaining ball processing time in the big winning opening, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 and the like during this ending period.

After steps A6504 and A6507, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A6508). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (result of A6508 is "Y"), the set processing number ("3" or "6") is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6509), set The time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6510), and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

If the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A6508 is "N"), that is, if the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 determines the processing number ("3" or "6"). ) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6511), the set time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6512), and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is completed. .

[Jackpot end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot ending process transition setting process (A6505) in the big winning hole remaining ball process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot ending process transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal (off data of the special electric role product 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric role product 2 operating signal) related to the end of the large winning opening to the test signal output data area ( A6601), clear the big winning hole count area that holds the big winning hole count number in the RWM (A6602), and clear the round number area (A6603). Subsequently, the round number upper limit area is cleared (A6604), the round number upper limit information area is cleared (A6605), the big winning opening opening information area is cleared (A6606), and the process control pointer area during the jackpot is cleared. (A6607).

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A6701), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6702). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the jackpot (off data of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal off data) is saved in the external information output data area (A6703), and the signal about the start of the high probability & short time (output from the jackpot) (A6704).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6705). Signals relating to the end of the jackpot are, for example, OFF data of the conditional device operating signal, OFF data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and OFF data of the one special symbol winning signal. Subsequently, a signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6706). Here, the signal regarding the start of high probability & time reduction is, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, a special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal. . After that, the signal (firing position designation signal 1) relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (A6707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a number with a high probability in the game state display number area (A6708), saves a number with a right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (A6709), and saves a round LED pointer. Save the number of lights out in the area (A6710). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6711), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6712), and the special figure status Clear area (A6713)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot state (A6714). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern is only the variable probability pattern, and after the jackpot ends, the state becomes a high-probability state and also the time-saving state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high-probability fluctuation frequency is saved in the high-probability fluctuation frequency region for holding the high-probability fluctuation frequency (A6715). After that, save the probability information command (high probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6716).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6717), and ends the special figure 1 big hit ending process. This special figure 2 game wait time value delays the determination of the start of variation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) at the next timer interrupt process (Fig. 6) is set to Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec which is twice the time of the interrupt cycle (ie, 2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area).

Assuming that the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, special figure 2 game processing ( A1311 in FIG. 6), because the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts (starting in this timer interrupt process), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started from the special figure 1 fluctuation display game It may start earlier and cause problems. In addition, since the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it remains at 0. Therefore, regarding the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game, it is performed in the next timer interrupt process (special figure 1 normal process during the special figure 1 game process).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to twice the interrupt period (8 msec), but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process (starting within the timer interrupt process of this time ) This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt process, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) and becomes 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game The determination of the start of fluctuation (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) is performed. As a result, in the next timer interrupt processing after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game, the determination of the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing) is performed, and if the starting condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can start varying at the same time. In addition, as described above, while the special figure 1 variation display game is in the jackpot state, the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped with a lost pattern (forcibly terminated or originally not changed).

In addition, after the end of the jackpot state, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, if there is no particular problem in game control, the processing of step A6717 is omitted, and the special It is not necessary to set the FIG. 2 game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number to return to the special figure 2 normal processing (A6801), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6802). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the jackpot (off data of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal off data) is saved in the external information output data area (A6803), and the signal about the start of the high probability & short time (output from the jackpot) (A6804).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6805). Signals relating to the end of the jackpot are, for example, OFF data of the conditional device operating signal, OFF data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and OFF data of the special pattern 2 winning signal. Subsequently, a signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6806). Here, the signal regarding the start of high probability & time reduction is, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, a special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal. . After that, the signal (firing position designation signal 1) relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (A6807).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the high probability number in the game state display number area (A6808), saves the right hitting number in the game state display number 2 area (A6809), and the round LED pointer. Save the number of lights out in the area (A6810). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6811), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6812), special figure status Clear area (A6813)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to make the high probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot state (A6814). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern is only the variable probability pattern, and after the jackpot ends, the state becomes a high-probability state and also the time-saving state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high-probability fluctuation frequency is saved in the high-probability fluctuation frequency region for holding the high-probability fluctuation frequency (A6815). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6816).

It should be noted that there is no need to set the special figure 1 game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end process. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0, and in the next timer interrupt process, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game start to fluctuate. Judgment (within special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing) is performed, and if the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game start fluctuation at the same time because it can

[Processing during small win fanfare]
Next, the details of the process (A3215, A3318) during the small hit fanfare in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during the small winning fanfare.

First, the game control device 100 performs branching according to the opening pattern of the large winning opening due to the small hit (special figure 1 small win, special figure 2 small win 1, 2, 3) (A6901). The opening pattern of the big winning opening due to the small hit corresponds to the stop pattern number of the small win (A4312a, A4312b) or the small win pattern (stop pattern pattern of A4313a, A4313b).

The game control device 100, when the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, prepares the command during the small hit opening of the lower big winning opening opening as the production command (A6902), and executes the production command setting process ( A6903). Next, set "8" as the processing number (A6904), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6905), and set the small winning opening time 1 (for example, 48 msec) as the opening time of the big winning opening Save in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6906). Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small winning operation (on data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6907), and the lower large winning opening ON data is stored in the large winning opening solenoid output data area is saved (A6908).

The game control device 100, when the opening pattern due to the small win is the special figure 2 small win 1, prepares the command during the small win opening of the lower big winning opening opening as the production command (A6909), and executes the production command setting process. (A6910). Next, set "8" as the processing number (A6911), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6912), and set the small winning opening time 2 (for example, 1600 msec) as the opening time of the big winning opening Save in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6913). Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small winning operation (ON data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6914), and the lower large winning opening ON data is stored in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. is saved (A6915).

The game control device 100, when the opening pattern due to the small win is the special figure 2 small win 2, prepares the command during the small win opening of the upper big winning opening opening as the production command (A6916), and executes the production command setting process. (A6917). Next, set "8" as the processing number (A6918), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6919), and set the small winning opening time 3 (for example, 1200 msec) as the opening time of the big winning opening Save in special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6920). Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small winning operation (on data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6921), and the upper large winning opening ON data is stored in the large winning opening solenoid output data area is saved (A6922).

The game control device 100, when the opening pattern by the small win is the special figure 2 small win 3, prepares the command during the small win opening of the upper big winning prize opening opening as the production command (A6923), and executes the production command setting process. (A6924). Next, set "8" as the processing number (A6925), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6926), and set the small winning opening time 4 (for example, 1600 msec) as the opening time of the big winning opening Save in special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6927). Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small winning operation (on data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6928), and the upper large winning opening ON data is stored in the large winning opening solenoid output data area is saved (A6929).

After steps A6908, A6915, A6922, and A6929, the game control device 100 clears the big winning opening count area (A6930), and ends the small winning fanfare process.

As described above, for each type of small hit release pattern corresponding to the small hit stop pattern number or the small hit pattern (special figure 1 small hit, special figure 2 small hit 1, 2, 3), the size to be opened by the small hit The winning opening (either the upper big winning opening or the lower big winning opening), the opening time of the big winning opening (small hit opening time), etc. are determined. In this embodiment, the control pointer is not set, and only the small winning opening pattern in which the big winning opening is opened only once is used. There may be a repeating small hit open pattern. Further, by setting "8" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the processing during the small winning after the processing during the small winning fanfare is completed.

[Small hit middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit process (A3216, A3319) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during a small hit.

The game control device 100 first prepares a small hit end screen command as a production command (A7001), and executes production command setting processing (A7002). Thereby, the effect control device 300 that has received the small winning end screen command can cause the display device 41 to display the small winning end screen.

Next, the game control device 100 performs branching according to the opening pattern of the large winning opening due to the small win (special figure 1 small win, special figure 2 small win 1, 2, 3) (A7003).

The game control device 100 sets "9" as the processing number when the release pattern due to the small win is the special figure 1 small win (A7004), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A7005). , Small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7006). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower big winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper big winning opening solenoid 39b, the OFF data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A7007), and the process during the small winning is ended.

The game control device 100 sets "9" as the processing number when the opening pattern due to the small hit is the special figure 2 small prize 1 (A7008), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7009 ), saving the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (for example, 600 msec) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7010). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower big winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper big winning opening solenoid 39b, the OFF data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A7011), and the process during the small winning is ended.

The game control device 100 sets "9" as the processing number when the release pattern due to the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 2 or the special figure 2 small hit 3 (A7012), and sets the special figure 2 game processing number area. The processing number is saved (A7013), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (for example, 800 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7014). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower big winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper big winning opening solenoid 39b, the OFF data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A7015), and the process during the small winning is ended.

By setting "9" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small-hit remaining ball processing after the end of the small-hit processing.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (A3217, A3320) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the procedure of small hit remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variation display game (A7101). If it is a small hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A7101 is "Y"), set "10" as the processing number (A7102), save this processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area ( A7103), small hit ending time (eg 100msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7104).

The game control device 100 sets "10" as the processing number when it is not a small hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A7101 is "N"), that is, when it is a small hit in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Then (A7105), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7106), and the small hit ending time (eg 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7107).

After steps A7104 and A7107, the game control device 100 outputs a signal (off data of the special electric role product 1 in operation signal and off data of the special electric role product 2 in operation signal) related to the end of the small hit operation as test signal output data. It saves in the area (A7108), clears the big winning hole count number area (A7109), and ends the small hit remaining ball processing. Incidentally, by setting "10" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small-hit end processing after finishing the small-hit remaining ball processing.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit ending process.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number to return to the special figure 1 normal process (A7201), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A7202). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the small win (off data of the special symbol 1 small win signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7203), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7204). In addition, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A7205), and clear the special figure status area (A7206).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in a high probability state (A7207). If the high probability state (result of A7207 is "Y"), save the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210). If it is not a high probability state (the result of A7207 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7208), and in the game state display number 2 area The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7209), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210).

Here, for the same reason as step A6717 of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing (FIG. 53), 8 msec, which is twice the time of the interrupt cycle (2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), It is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area as a special figure 2 game wait time value. As a result, in the next timer interrupt processing after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game, the determination of the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing) is performed, and if the starting condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can start varying at the same time.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number to return to the special figure 2 normal processing (A7301), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the small win (off data of the special symbol 2 small win signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7304), and saves the during fraud monitoring period flag in the lower grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7305). In addition, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A7306), and clear the special figure status area (A7307).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in a high probability state (A7308). If it is in a high probability state (result of A7308 is "Y"), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. If it is not a high probability state (the result of A7308 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7309), and in the game state display number 2 area The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7310), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

In addition, for the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 54), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit end process.

[Symbol variation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (A3220, A3323) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the symbol variation control process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol.

In the game control device 100, first, among the special figures 1 and 2, the special figure variation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1) is a fluctuating flag (a flag indicating that it is fluctuating). (A7401). If it is in fluctuation, a fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area (A5205a, A5205b).

And, as a result of the check, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation control flag is a flag during fluctuation (A7402), and if the special figure fluctuation control flag is a flag during fluctuation (A7402 The result is "Y"), to obtain the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the special figure (for example, special figure 1) to be controlled (A7403). The address of the pattern display table (for variation) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Furthermore, among the special figures 1 and 2, the flashing control timer related to the special figure (for example, special figure 1) to be controlled is updated by -1 (A7404), and the value of the timer is 0, that is, the time is up. (A7405).

If the value of the flashing control timer is not 0 (the result of A7405 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the display data corresponding to the value of the target varying pattern number area (A7408). If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (result of A7405 is "Y"), the initial value of the blink control timer (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the area of the blink control timer to be controlled (A7406). Furthermore, among the special figures 1 and 2, the variable pattern number related to the special figure of the control target (for example, special figure 1) is updated by +1 and saved in the target variable pattern number area (A7407), the target Display data corresponding to the value of the changing pattern number area is acquired (A7408). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the pattern variation control process is terminated.

In this way, the variable display game that repeats the non-lighting pattern (fluctuation pattern number = 0) and the lighting pattern (fluctuation pattern number = 1) is a special figure indicator (special figure 1 indicator 51 or It is executed in the special figure 2 indicator 52). The initial value of the changing pattern number is set to, for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting pattern (A5207a, A5207b).

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuating flag is not the fluctuating flag (the result of A7402 is "N"), the game control device 100 is a symbol display table (for example, special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled ( for stop) is acquired (A7409). The address of the symbol display table (for stop) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Then, display data corresponding to the target stop symbol area value (stop symbol number) is acquired (A7410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

In this way, among the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the special figure indicator (special figure 1 indicator 51 or special figure 2 indicator 52) to be controlled, the stop pattern number The stop pattern of the corresponding special figure will be displayed. In the stop symbol area, stop symbol numbers are saved corresponding to big hits, small wins, or losses (A5324, A5424).

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1315) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the procedure of external information editing processing. In the external information editing process, information Information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal, a game arcade internal management device, or a test shooting test device is created and set in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame open error is occurring (A7801). If the glass frame open error is not occurring (the result of A7801 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the body frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A7802). If the body frame open error is not occurring (the result of A7802 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7803), and the OFF data of the security signal is saved as the external information output data. Save to area (A7804).

The game control device 100, when the glass frame open error is occurring (the result of A7801 is "Y"), or when the body frame open error is occurring (the result of A7802 is "Y"), The ON data of the frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7806).

After steps A7804 and A7806, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A7807), and checks whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time has expired). Judge (A7808). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch (A1026 of main processing). Then, the security signal control timer starts counting from the time of RAM initialization.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A7808 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether frame radio fraud is occurring (A7809). If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A7808 is "N"), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. That is, the external information indicating that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output.

If the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A7809 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A7811). If frame radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A7809 is "Y"), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A7811 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7812), and the process proceeds to step A7813.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the magnet fraud is occurring (A7813) when the switch abnormality error is not occurring (the result of A7811 is "N"). Note that when the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A7813 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not board radio fraud is occurring (A7814). If the radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the radio wave fraud is occurring.

If board radio fraud is not occurring (the result of A7814 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not big winning gate fraud is occurring (A7815). Incidentally, when the fraudulent prize occurrence flag regarding the big prize mouth (upper prize mouth or lower prize mouth) is saved in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that the fraud of the big prize mouth is occurring. If the big winning mouth fraud is not occurring (the result of A7815 is "N"), furthermore, it is determined whether the special figure 2 abnormal variation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 variation display game) is occurring ( A7816). In addition, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, it can be determined that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring. If the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is not occurring (the result of A7816 is "N"), the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7817).

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A7813 is "Y"), when the board radio fraud is occurring (the result of A7814 is "Y"), the big winning mouth fraud If it is occurring (the result of A7815 is "Y"), or if the special figure 2 abnormal change is occurring (the result of A7816 is "Y"), the security signal ON data is stored in the external information output data area Save (A7818), and save the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A7819). By setting the security signal to ON data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After steps A7817 and A7819, the game control device 100 performs starting port 1 signal editing processing (A7820), starting port 2 signal editing processing (A7821), main prize ball signal editing processing (A7822), symbol determination number signal editing processing ( A7823) is executed to end the external information editing process. The starting port 1 signal editing processing is processing when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, and the starting port 2 signal editing processing is processing when there is an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a.

[Signal determination number signal editing process]
Next, the details of the pattern confirmation count signal editing process (A7023) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the number-of-symbols-fixed signal editing process. The number-of-symbols-fixed-count signal editing process is a process of outputting to an external device a number-of-symbols-fixed-count signal generated when a stop pattern of a variable display game is decided.

The game control device 100 first updates the number-of-symbols decision signal output control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A8101). Note that the minimum value of the pattern determination count signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the number-of-symbols-fixed signal output control timer is 0 (A8102).

When the value of the pattern confirmation number signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A8102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the pattern confirmation number signal output number is 0. (A8103).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the design determination frequency signal output frequency by -1 (A8104) when the pattern determination frequency signal output frequency is not 0 (the result of A8103 is "N"), and outputs the symbol determination frequency signal output. The initial value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is saved in the control timer (A8105). The initial value of the design decision number signal output control timer is the sum of the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 256 msec) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 300 msec) of the pattern decision number signal. (for example, 556 msec).

After that, the game control device 100 saves ON data for turning on the number of symbol determination signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8107), and ends the number of symbol determination signal editing process. In addition, when the output number of times of design decision number signal is 0 (result of A8103 is "Y"), off data for turning off the pattern decision number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. (A8108), and the design decision count signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the number of symbol determination signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8102 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the number of symbol determination signal output control timer is in the output ON section. is determined (A8106). It should be noted that the design determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the design determination number signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 msec) or more.

When the pattern confirmation number signal output control timer is in the output ON section (the result of A8106 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs ON data for turning on the pattern confirmation number signal as external information of RWM. Save in the data area (A8107). In addition, when the pattern confirmation number signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (the result of A8106 is "N"), off data for turning off the pattern confirmation number signal for the external device is external information output data of the RWM. The data is saved in the area (A8108), and the pattern determination count signal editing process is terminated.

[Modified example of control of game control device]
Below, the modification of control (process) of a game control apparatus is demonstrated. Configurations other than those described below are the same as the aforementioned control (processing) of the game control device.

In the above control processing (FIGS. 39, 40, etc.), during the fluctuation of one special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game or special figure 2 variation display game), the other special figure variation display game When (special figure 2 variation display game or special figure 1 variation display game) becomes a hit result (big hit or small win), one of the special figure variation display games is forcibly changed and ended (forcibly terminated) with a losing result. However, as in the following modification, in this case, regarding this one special figure variation display game, the measurement of the variation time by the timer is interrupted to derive the game result (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and one of the interrupted special figure variation display games is restarted after the winning operation of the other special figure variation display game is finished (after the big win state or the small win state is finished).

It should be noted that even while the special figure variation display game is interrupted, the special symbol (identification information) itself apparently continues to change in the display device 41 and the special figure variation display unit (special figure 1 indicator 51 or special figure 2 indicator 52) (It should be noted that it is also possible to temporarily stop the fluctuation of the special symbol during the interruption). In the case of apparently continuing the fluctuation, in another concept, it can be said that the fluctuation time for one special symbol is extended by the time of the winning operation for the other special symbol (the time of the big win state or the small win state). .

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 game process (A1310) described above will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 game processing according to the modification. FIG. 63 is obtained by adding the processing of step S8200 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A3201 to A3220 in FIG. 63 is the same as in FIG. 18, the description is omitted.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted is set (S8200). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8200 is "N"), the processing from step A3201 to A3220 is executed.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (the result of S8200 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A3201 to A3218, and changes the special figure 1 indicator 51. After preparing the special figure 1 variation control table for control (A3219), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted, the timing (renewal) of the variation time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variation time is stopped. It should be noted that, in the special figure 1 display device 51, the special symbol variation itself apparently continues due to the symbol variation control process.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing (Modified Example)]
A modification of the special figure 2 game process (A1311) described above will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game processing according to the modification. FIG. 64 is obtained by adding the processing of step S8300 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A3301 to A3323 in FIG. 64 is the same as in FIG. 19, the description is omitted.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted is set (S8300). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8300 is "N"), the processing from step A3301 to A3323 is executed.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (the result of S8300 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does not perform the processing from step A3301 to A3321, and changes the special figure 2 indicator 52. After preparing the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling (A3322), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is terminated. In this way, when the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the timing (renewal) of the variation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the variation time is stopped. It should be noted that, by design variation control processing, in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variation itself of the special design is seemingly continued.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Process (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuating process according to the modification. FIG. 65 is obtained by deleting the processing from steps A5311 to A5319 in FIG. 39 and adding the processing from steps S8411 to S8416. The processing from steps A5301 to A5310 and from steps A5320 to A5325 in FIG. 65 are the same as in FIG. 39, so description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not lost (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and if the special figure 2 is fluctuating (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (A5309 The result is "N" and the result of A5310 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted by the processing of steps S8411 to S8416. When the special figure 1 variation display game of the winning result stops variation, the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted.

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not lost and when the special figure 2 is fluctuating, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a loss (S8411). . If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost (the result of S8411 is "Y"), the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (special figure 2 game processing timer = 4 msec). Determine (S8412). That is, based on the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variation display game will end at the same timing as the special figure 1 variation display game (in the same interrupt processing). do.

When the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (the result of S8412 is "Y"), the game control device 100 performs special figure 2 game processing immediately after this special figure 1 game processing (this timer interrupt Start within the process) to update the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) to 0, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be ended with the result of losing. Therefore, in this case, since there is no need to interrupt the special figure 2 variable display game, the process proceeds to step A5324.

The game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not lost (the result of S8411 is "N"), or if the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 msec (the result of S8412 is "N ”), a special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted is set (S8413). Special figure 2 game interruption flag is used for the determination of the above step S8300. Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8414), and an effect command setting process is executed (S8415). The production control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 interruption command can set the production for interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (reduction of 4 msec) (S8416). This is because the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S8413), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process this time, Here, instead, the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). Thereby, when resuming the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game, it is possible to prevent the extra figure 2 game processing timer from increasing by 4 msec (see FIG. 85).

After step S8416, the game control device 100 executes the processing from steps A5320 to A5325 in the same manner as in FIG. In addition, unlike FIG. 39, in special figure 1 fluctuation process according to the modification, the process shift setting process 2 is not executed during special figure 2 display.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Process (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 2 during fluctuation processing (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process according to the modification. FIG. 66 is obtained by deleting the processing from steps A5411 to A5419 of FIG. 40 and adding the processing from steps S8511 to S8513. The processing from steps A5401 to A5410 and from steps A5420 to A5425 in FIG. 66 are the same as in FIG. 40, so description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a loss (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and if the special figure 1 is fluctuating (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (A5409 If the result is "N" and the result of A5410 is "Y"), the processing from steps S8511 to S8513 interrupts the special figure 1 variation display game. When the special figure 2 variation display game of the winning result stops variation, the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted.

The game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not lost and when the special figure 1 is fluctuating. Set (S8511). The special figure 1 game interruption flag is used for the determination of the above-described step S8200. Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8512), and an effect command setting process is executed (S8513). The production control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 interruption command can set the production for interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game.

After step S8513, the game control device 100 executes the processing from steps A5420 to A5325 in the same manner as in FIG. In addition, unlike FIG. 40, in special figure 2 change during processing which concerns on a modification, process transition setting process 2 is not performed during special figure 1 display.

[Special Figure 1 Jackpot End Processing (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process according to the modification. FIG. 67 is obtained by adding processing from steps S8617 to S8621 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A6701 to A6716 in FIG. 67 is the same as that in FIG. 53, the description is omitted.

After step A6716, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (S8617). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of S8617 is "N"), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (S8620), The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621), and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8617 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (S8618), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8619). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. After that, clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (S8620), and save the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621) , ends the special figure 1 jackpot end processing.

By clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the timing (update) of the variation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) that measures the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game restarts (the result of S8300 is " N"). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

The processing of step S8621 is the same as that of step A6717 in FIG. 53, and the special figure 2 game wait time value is the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game. (Resume) is set to delay the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 6), which is 8 msec, which is twice the interrupt period. As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game can be restarted simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 variation display game by the timer interrupt processing after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game. If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 variation display game will be started (restarted) in the current timer interrupt process before the special figure 1 variation display game. It should be noted that, after the end of the jackpot state, even if the special figure 2 variation display game starts (resumes) earlier than the special figure 1 variation display game, if there is no particular problem in game control, the processing of step A8621 is omitted. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the special figure 2 game wait time value.

Also, depending on the special figure 2 game wait time value, the determination of the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game will be at the time of the next timer interrupt process, but the decoration special figure 2 restart command is set and transmitted first. This is because the processing cycle of the effect control device 300 is longer than that of the game control device 100, so that the time (4 msec) for one interruption can be absorbed.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing (variant)]
A modification of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process according to the modification. FIG. 68 is obtained by adding processing from steps S8717 to S8720 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A6801 to A6816 in FIG. 68 is the same as in FIG. 54, the description is omitted.

After step A6816, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (S8717). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of S8717 is "N"), clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (S8720), 2. End the jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8717 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (S8718), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8719). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8720), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is ended.

By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the timing (update) of the variation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) that measures the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game restarts (the result of S8300 is " N"). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

In addition, in the special figure 2 jackpot ending process, the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set. This is because both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started (restarted) in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) even if there is no special figure 2 game wait time value.

[Special figure 1 small hit end process (variant example)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process according to the modification. FIG. 69A is obtained by adding processing from steps S8810 to S8814 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A7201 to A7209 in FIG. 58 is the same as in FIG. 58, the description is omitted.

If the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A7207 is "Y"), or after step A7209, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (S8810). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of S8810 is "N"), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area (S8813), set the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) to the special figure 2 game Save in the processing timer area (S8814), and end the special figure 1 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8810 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (S8811), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8812). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), the special figure 2 game wait time value (8msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended. do. As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game can be restarted simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 variation display game in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game. Note that the processing of step S8814 is the same as that of step A7210 in FIG. Also, by clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been interrupted will be resumed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing according to the modification. FIG. 69B is obtained by adding processing from steps S8911 to S8814 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A7301 to A7210 in FIG. 59 is the same as in FIG. 59, the description is omitted.

If the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A7308 is "Y"), or after step A7310, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (S8911). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of S8911 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of S8911 is "Y"), prepares the decoration special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (S8912), and executes the effect command setting process. (S8913). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. In addition, by clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that has been interrupted can be resumed.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated. For convenience of explanation, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described as corresponding to the above modified example of the control of the game control device 100 (configuration for restarting the interrupted special figure fluctuation display game). In the case of the basic configuration (configuration that is not a modification) for forcibly terminating the special figure variation display game, the processing related to the interruption and resumption of the special figure variation display game may be omitted.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B1001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B1002, B1003), and interrupts are permitted (B1004). When the interruption is permitted, the command reception interruption process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 can be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initialization (B1002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B1009). Subsequently, hall/player setting mode processing for receiving operations such as changing the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and volume by the player is executed (B1011). Then, random number update processing for updating random numbers such as effect random numbers is executed (B1011), the received command received from the game control device 100 is analyzed, and the corresponding received command check processing is executed (B1012). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display editing processing such as updating various data according to the content to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like, and setting the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B1013). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B1014).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is frame switching timing (B1015). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B1015 is "N"), the process of B1015 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Screen drawing is instructed (B1016). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1017).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) made up of LEDs and the like (B1018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1019). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute a role object action effect.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B1008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B1019. Thereafter, the processing from B1008 to B1019 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, details of the received command check process (B1012) in the main process (FIG. 70) described above will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the number of received commands from the value (B1103), the content of the received command buffer in the RAM is copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the contents of the received command analysis. 72. Further, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), and then in the processing of step B1101. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the loaded commands for the number of received commands has been completed (B1110). If the analysis has not been completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processing from steps B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 71) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). A command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE section indicating the type of command. be. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are composed of the MODE section and the ACTION section in that order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, if the ACTION part is within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). It should be noted that the variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special design, and includes variation commands (A5014 and A5015 in FIG. 36). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result in B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a variation command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the hit command (B1207). Incidentally, the hit-related commands are commands for commanding operations (such as display of a fanfare screen and a round screen) during a big win or a small win. . If the MODE part indicates a winning command (the result in B1207 is "Y"), the winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the winning command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the pattern command (B1209). It should be noted that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special figure 1 command (A4316a in FIG. 29A) and a decoration special figure 2 command (A4316b in FIG. 29B) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE part indicates a symbolic command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbolic command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If the MODE part does not represent a pattern-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a single-shot system command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). . The look-ahead symbol system command includes the look-ahead stop symbol command (A3111 in FIG. 17). Then, when the MODE part indicates a look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), a look-ahead symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead pattern system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (B1215 ). The look-ahead variation commands include the look-ahead variation pattern command (A3115 in FIG. 17). If the MODE part indicates a prefetch variation command (result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( If the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process ends.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 72) described above will be described. FIG. 73A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. FIG. 73B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the one-shot command process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model specifying command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of game machine is executed (B1302), and single-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303 ). If the MODE part indicates a command for RAM initialization (result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and one-shot command processing is executed. finish.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). Then, if the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and single-shot command processing is terminated. In addition, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted (if there is a special figure game interruption flag that has been backed up in RWM), the special figure A suspended command (interrupted command) indicating that the 1 variable display game is suspended or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended is included.

If the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents the customer waiting demo command ( B1307). If the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demonstration command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command process ends.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (B1309). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of decoration special figure 2 reservation command (B1311). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is not transmitted from the game control device 100, so the processing of steps B1311 and B1312 may be omitted. However, if the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately even if the special figure 2 start memory occurs case), even in the above-mentioned special figure start port 2 switch process (FIG. 16), the special figure reservation information determination process (prefetching process, pre-determination process) is performed, and the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command from the game control device 100 may be sent.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, if the MODE part indicates a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents an error/illegal command ( B1315). In addition, as an error / fraud system command, for example, fraud occurrence command (A2108), fraud cancellation command (A2116), special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command (A2414), special figure 2 abnormal change cancellation command (A2418), state off There is a command (A2504) and a state ON command (A2507). If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing is executed to notify or cancel the notification of an error or illegality (B1316), Ends single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a command for switching the effect mode. Determine (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a command for pattern stop. (B1319). In addition, as a command for design stop, there are a decoration special figure 1 stop command and a decoration special figure 2 stop command. Then, if the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command is normal (B1320). If the command is not a normal command (the result of B1320 is "N"), the single-shot command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the command is normal (result of B1320 is "Y"), performs stop setting for stopping the corresponding special figure (decoration special figure 1 or decoration special figure 2) (B1321). Then, when all the special symbols (identification information) in the plurality of variable display areas of the display device 41 have stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (B1322), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In addition, the game state flag is a flag that can indicate states such as during variation, during a big hit, during a small hit, and the like.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command for pattern stop (the result of B1319 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the command for fluctuation interruption. (B1323). In addition, the command for the fluctuation interruption is the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (S8512 in FIG. 66) and the decoration special figure 2 interruption command (S8414 in FIG. 65). If the MODE part indicates a command for interrupting the fluctuation (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the fluctuation interruption setting process is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command for the fluctuation interruption (the result of B1323 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the command for the restart of the fluctuation. (B1325). It should be noted that the command for the fluctuation restart is the above-mentioned decorative special figure 1 restart command (S8718 in FIG. 68) and decorative special figure 2 restart command (S8618 in FIG. 67). Then, if the MODE part indicates a command for interrupting the fluctuation (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the fluctuation restart setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

In addition, even if the command for interrupting the fluctuation is not received, if a hit-related command relating to the performance of a win (big hit or small win) of one of the special figures 1 and 2 is received in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game, The production control device 300 may automatically determine whether or not the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, and the fluctuation interruption setting process and the subsequent fluctuation restart setting process may be performed.

In addition, in the one-shot system command processing, the effect control device 300 may receive commands other than the above-described commands and perform corresponding processing.

[Variation interruption setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, details of the fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) in the above-described one-shot command process (FIG. 73) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the fluctuation interruption setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command for fluctuation interruption is a normal command (B1401). If the command is not a normal command (the result of B1401 is "N"), the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated. If the command is normal (the result of B1401 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command was received when the power was turned on (B1402). If the command is received when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is "Y"), in response to the received command (decoration special figure 1 interruption command or decoration special figure 2 interruption command), decoration special figure fluctuation display game Set the suspended flag of the decoration special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating that it is in the middle of interruption (B1403).

If the effect control device 300 does not receive a command when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is "N"), the target pattern (decorative special figure 1 or decorative special figure 2) to be interrupted from now on is fluctuating. That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display game of symbols to be interrupted is being executed (B1404). If the target symbol is not fluctuating (the result of B1404 is "N"), the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated. When the design of object is fluctuating (the result of B1404 is "Y"), it decides whether or not the command for fluctuation discontinuation which is received is decoration special figure 1 discontinuation command (B1405).

Effect control device 300, when the command for the received fluctuation interruption is decoration special figure 1 interruption command (the result of B1405 is "Y"), sets the fluctuation display for decoration special figure 1 interruption (B1406). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decoration special figure 1 is displayed large in the center, set the variable display for interruption such that it is moved to the corner and displayed in a reduced size. Alternatively, it is also possible to set an interruption variable display that displays in a state with higher transparency than usual. Subsequently, the decoration special figure 1 interrupting flag indicating that the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1407). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (B1408).

When the effect control device 300 is in a low probability state (the result of B1408 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the result of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (B1409). If the result of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is "N"), the display device 41 etc. suggests the interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game, so that the decoration special figure 1 variation display game The display setting for the interruption effect is executed (B1410), and the fluctuation interruption setting process is ended.

If the production control device 300 is not in a low probability state (the result of B1408 is "N"), that is, if it is in a high probability state, the production of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, the display setting for interruption of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not performed, and the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated. Also, if the result of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (the result of B1409 is "Y"), the display device 41 preferentially displays the effect of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game jackpot, so the decoration The fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated without performing the display setting for the interruption effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command for the received fluctuation interruption is not a decoration special figure 1 interruption command (the result of B1405 is "N"), that is, if it is a decoration special figure 2 interruption command, decoration special figure 2 (B1411). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 is displayed in a large enlarged size in the center (main display, normal display), it is moved to a corner and displayed in a small reduced size. A variable display for suspension may be set, or a variable display for suspension that is displayed in a state with higher transparency than usual may be set. Subsequently, the during suspension flag of the decoration special figure 2 indicating that the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is being suspended is set in the RAM or the like (B1412). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (B1413).

If the effect control device 300 is not in a low probability state (the result of B1413 is "N"), that is, if it is in a high probability state, it is determined whether or not the result of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (B1414 ). If the result of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is "N"), the display device 41 etc. suggests the interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, so that the decoration special figure 2 variation display game The display setting for the interruption effect is executed (B1415), and the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 is in a low probability state (the result of B1413 is "Y"), since the effect of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41, the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation The variable interruption setting process is terminated without performing the display setting for the interruption effect of the display game. In addition, when the result of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of B1414 is "Y"), the display device 41 preferentially displays the big hit effect of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. The fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated without performing the display setting for the interruption effect of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

[Variable restart setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, details of the variable restart setting process (B1326) in the above-described one-shot command process (FIG. 73) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable restart setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command for restarting the fluctuation is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not a normal command (the result of B1501 is "N"), the variable restart setting process is terminated. If it is a normal command (the result of B1501 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command for the received fluctuation restart is the decoration special figure 1 restart command (B1502).

Effect control device 300, if the command for the received variation restart is the decoration special figure 1 resume command (the result of B1502 is "Y"), based on the flag during the interruption of decoration special figure 1, decoration special figure 1 variation It is determined whether or not the display game is being interrupted (B1503). If the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of B1503 is "N"), the fluctuation restart setting process is terminated.

When the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of B1503 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 clears the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 1 (B1504). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1505). The power failure recovery display is a display suggesting that the power failure has been recovered and that processing after power failure recovery is being performed. If the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1505 is "Y"), set the variable restart of the decorative special figure 1 for recovery according to the probability state (restart the decorative special figure 1 variable display game for recovery) (B1506). If the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1505 is "N"), the decoration special figure 1 variable display game restart (not for recovery) is set according to the probability state (B1507).

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the received variable restart command is not a decoration special figure 1 restart command (the result of B1502 is "N"), that is, if it is a decoration special figure 2 restart command, decoration special figure 2 Based on the interrupted flag, it is determined whether or not the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (B1508). If the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of B1508 is "N"), the fluctuation restart setting process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of B1508 is "Y"), clears the during interruption flag of decoration special figure 2 (B1509). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1510). If the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1510 is "Y"), set the variable restart of the decorative special figure 2 for recovery according to the probability state (restart the decorative special figure 2 variable display game for recovery) (B1511). If the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1510 is "N"), restart the decoration special figure 2 variable display game according to the probability state (not for recovery) is set (B1512).

With respect to the processing of steps B1506, B1507, B1511, and B1512, there is a possibility that the probability state has changed when the decoration special figure variation display game is interrupted and when it is resumed. Therefore, when the game is restarted, the pattern display mode differs depending on whether or not the target pattern is preferentially displayed. For example, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during a low probability, the reduced pattern of the special figure 1 in the corner of the display device 41 will be interrupted while the fluctuation continues, but if the probability is low even when restarting, the special figure 1 is largely preferentially displayed in the center of the display device 41. If it is in a high probability / time saving state at the time of restart, it will be restarted with the reduced pattern (reduced display).

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the details of the prefetch symbol system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 72) described above will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the look-ahead symbol system command process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

Production control device 300, first, whether or not the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure reservation number command received at the latest is the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern system command (look-ahead stop design command) to the special figure 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations Save (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the decoration special figure pending number command received at the latest is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command In the case, save the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment as described above, since the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is not transmitted from the game control device 100, the processing of step B1603 is not basically executed. However, if the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately even if the special figure 2 start memory occurs In case), the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is transmitted from the game control device 100, and the process of step B1603 may be executed.

Effect control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a look-ahead variation-based command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation-based command (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are set, and therefore the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variation system command following the look-ahead design system command. After that, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 77, the details of the look-ahead variation-related command processing (B1215) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 72) described above will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the prefetch variation command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation command (B1701). If the above-mentioned prefetch variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that reception of a prefetch variation-related command is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. If the prefetch variation command is waiting for reception (the result in B1701 is "Y"), the prefetch variation command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of suspensions of the design of the latest suspension information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and of the look-ahead variation system command The MODE portion of the intra-sub prefetch variation command is acquired corresponding to the MODE portion (B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and an intra-sub look-ahead variation command ACT portion corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the look-ahead variation command is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (effective), it is converted to a value other than 0. If both the MODE part and ACT part after conversion are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the MODE part and ACT part after conversion corresponds to the latest pending information and pending number. Save to the prefetching variation command area (special figure 1 prefetching variation command area or special figure 2 prefetching variation command area) (B1708). Then, prefetch command consistency check processing is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of suspensions when the variation display game is started. When the pending change display game is started, if there is no other pending, the first half variation is longer, and if there is a new pending and the number of pending is large, the first half is shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation system command is converted into the sub internal prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half variation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are types in the reach of the same system, if the production control device 300 uses it as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. . For example, normal reach also has types such as normal reach minus 1 stop failure and normal reach plus 1 stop failure. Therefore, by converting the ACT portion indicating the reach of the same system to the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion, the number is reduced and the load of check processing such as prefetch command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is determined that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the most recently generated latest hold is a miss (B1711). . Effect control device 300, when the latest pending is hit (result of B1711 is "N"), calculates the total time until the special figure fluctuation display game of the latest pending ends (B1712). The total time includes the display time of the stop symbols.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the other decoration special figure variation display game is to be interrupted when the variation of the latest pending special figure variation display game ends (B1713). In addition, if the latest reservation is a special figure 1 reservation, the other decoration special figure variation display game becomes a decoration special figure 2 variation display game. Here, for example, after the calculated total time, if the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is not executed, or if the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is a loss fluctuation, the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game Determine not to interrupt.

If the effect control device 300 is to interrupt the other decoration special figure variation display game (the result of B1713 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not there is a plan to execute a look-ahead effect for suspension suspension (B1714). It should be noted that the suspension suspension is suspension corresponding to the decoration special figure variation display game to be suspended. In addition, the fact that there is an execution schedule includes the fact that the look-ahead effect is being executed. If there is a plan to execute the look-ahead effect for the suspension hold (the result of B1714 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect for the suspension hold is a hold change notice (B1715).

If the pre-reading effect of the suspension suspension is not a suspension change notice (the result of B1715 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the effect replacement for the pre-reading effect of the suspension suspension is in time (B1716). If the look-ahead effect has already progressed and it is unreasonable to forcibly end it, it is determined that the effect replacement will not be in time (the replacement is not performed). If the effect can be replaced in time (the result of B1716 is "Y"), the converted command is saved in the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and the number of pending so as to replace the effect (B1717).

Effect control device 300, if the latest hold is lost (the result of B1711 is "Y"), if the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is not interrupted (result of B1713 is "N"), suspension hold If there is no plan to execute the look-ahead effect for (B1714 result is "N"), if the look-ahead effect of the suspension hold is a hold change notice (B1715 result is "Y"), If the effect replacement is not in time (B1716's If the result is "N"), the process proceeds directly to step B1718 without replacing the effect.

Next, the effect control device 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) from the prefetch variation command area (B1718), and executes the prefetch lottery process for the latest hold prefetch effect (B1719). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest pending pre-reading notice effect is generated (B1720). If the latest pending pre-reading forewarning effect is generated (the result of B1720 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading forewarning effect to be generated is an effect for starting immediately (B1721). For example, the look-ahead notice effect is a hold change notice, and the immediate start effect is, for example, a hold change notice when a hold occurs. If the pre-reading advance notice effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1721 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1722). Then, the read-ahead variation command processing ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the latest pending pre-reading preview effect does not occur (the result of B1720 is "N"), or if the generated pre-reading preview effect is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1721 is "N" ), as is. Terminates look-ahead variation command processing.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment as described above, in the special figure start mouth 2 switch process special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetching processing, prior determination processing) is not performed, special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 reservation) On the other hand, the prefetching symbol system command (prefetching stop symbol command) and the prefetching variation system command (prefetching variation pattern command) are not transmitted from the game control device 100 . Therefore, the processing from steps B1715 to B1717 is basically not executed. However, if the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately even if the special figure 2 start memory occurs case), the prefetching pattern system command and the prefetching variation system command for the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 reservation) are transmitted from the game control device 100, and the processing of steps B1711 to B1717 is executed. good.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 72) described above will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, in special figure 1 and special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, using the table for each MODE, the design classification is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol types are the above-mentioned missing design, 2R probability variation design, 4R probability variation design, 8R probability variation design, and 16R probability variation design.

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 72) described above will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is undecided (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in the production, such as when a pattern-based command of a probability variable pattern is received even though a variation-based command that is out of line is received. If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variation command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, if the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (fluctuation command) (B1904), the effect during variation A variable effect setting process to be set is executed (B1905). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of read-ahead effects such as continuous effects is 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 79) described above will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), set the model code, special figure type, first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the production mode (B2002), variation system command ( Acquire the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is obtained.

Production control device 300, if the fluctuation pattern type is not a reach-less fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if there is a reach fluctuation, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, the first half corresponding to the pattern type The advance notice distribution group address table is set (B2004), and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE portion of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the fluctuation pattern type is obtained (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Next, set the late notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, production mode, and pattern type (B2007), and set the address of the late notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the fluctuation system command It acquires (B2008), and performs lottery for advance notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) (B2009). After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010). In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, the stop pattern of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the content of the variable performance such as the reach performance and the notice performance (B2012). Here, the decorative stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the loose stitches in the case of a lost pattern.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B2013). If the power failure restoration display is not being displayed (the result of B2013 is "N"), the process proceeds to step B2015. If the power failure restoration display is being displayed (result of B2013 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the current change relates to the main display pattern (B2014). It should be noted that the current variation is a decoration special figure variation display game executed by the current variation command. For example, when the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is displayed in a large enlargement (normal display) at the center of the display device 41, the special figure 1 is the main display.

If the current variation is related to the pattern that is the main display (the result of B2014 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the variable effect (B2015), and performs display setting of the notice effect. (B2016). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (B2017), and the voice number that determines the performance mode by the speaker and the decoration number that determines the performance operation of the decoration device are set (B2018).

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B2019), and the fourth special figure in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41 When there is (4th symbol), the display setting of the 4th symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (B2020). Incidentally, the fourth symbol variation may be displayed by an LED other than the display device 41. FIG.

On the other hand, if the effect control device 300 is displaying the power failure recovery display (the result of B2013 is "Y"), and if the current fluctuation is not related to the symbol that is the main display (the result of B2014 is " N"), that is, when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation during power failure restoration display and is related to the pattern displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the display device 41, the fluctuation production and the advance notice production are performed so as not to produce a flashy production. (B2015 to B2018 processing) and the like setting (B2015 to B2018 processing), display setting of decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to special figure classification is done (B2019).

[Modified example of control of production control device]
Below, the modification of control (processing) of an effect|presentation control apparatus is demonstrated. Configurations other than those described below are the same as the aforementioned control (processing) of the effect control device.

[Variation Interruption Setting Process (Modified Example)]
A modification of the above-described fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation interruption setting process according to the modification. FIG. 81 is obtained by deleting steps B1402, B1403, B1410 and B1415 from FIG. 74 and adding steps T2115, T2116, T2117 and T2118. In FIG. 81, the same step numbers (symbols) are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 74, and the description thereof is omitted.

The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is in a low probability state (the result of B1408 is "Y"), and if the result of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is "N"), the freeze display setting of the effect during variation of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is performed (T2115). The production during fluctuation includes the above-mentioned fluctuation production and advance notice production. Freezing includes, for example, freezing (stopping) of a movie (moving image). Here, you may also set display settings for a series of movies up to freezing. Subsequently, the display setting of superimposed images (such as movie display of characters, etc.) for freeze effects to be displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2116).

In addition, the effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 interruption command is not in a low probability state (the result of B1413 is "N"), and if the result of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (B1414 The result is "N"), and the freeze display setting of the effect during the fluctuation of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (T2117). The production during fluctuation includes the above-mentioned fluctuation production and advance notice production. Freezing includes, for example, freezing (stopping) of a movie (moving image). Here, you may also set display settings for a series of movies up to freezing. Subsequently, the display setting of the superimposed image for freeze effect to be displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2118).

In the above, after receiving the decoration special figure interruption command, it was made to perform freeze production, but based on the look-ahead system command, the production is performed before receiving the decoration special figure interruption command, and the decoration special figure interruption command reception At the same time, a freeze effect may be produced to heighten interest.

[Variable restart setting process (modified example)]
A modification of the variable restart setting process (B1326) described above will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variable restart setting processing according to the modification. FIG. 82 includes the processing of steps T2210-T2215 and T2216-T2221 instead of the processing of steps B1505-B1507 and B1510-B1512 of FIG. In FIG. 82, the same step numbers (symbols) are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 75, and the description thereof is omitted.

Effect control device 300, after step B1504, sets the variation restart of decoration special figure 1 according to the probability state (restart of decoration special figure 1 variation display game) (T2210). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2211). If the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2211 is "Y"), set the variable restart of the decorative special figure 1 in the reduced pattern (reduced display) (restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) (T2212 ).

Effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 resume command, if it is not during the display of the power failure recovery display (result of T2211 is "N"), the remaining fluctuation time determines whether it is a predetermined time or more ( T2213). When the remaining variable time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2213 is "Y"), display setting of rewind effect and reproduction speed are set (T2214), and the variable restart setting process ends. In addition, the rewind effect is performed once again at a fast reproduction speed in the display device 41, the effect before the interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. If the remaining variable time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2213 is "N"), the time for the rewinding effect is insufficient, so the display of the restart effect using the electric accessory and the setting of the accessory drive are performed (T2215). ), ending the variable restart setting process.

In addition, the decoration special figure 2 restart command effect control device 300 sets the fluctuation restart of the decoration special figure 2 according to the probability state (restart of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game) after step B1509 (T2216). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2217). If the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2217 is "Y"), set the variable restart of the decorative special figure 2 in the reduced pattern (reduced display) (restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) (T2218 ).

If the effect control device 300 is not displaying the power failure restoration display (the result of T2217 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (T2219). When the remaining variable time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2219 is "Y"), display setting of rewind effect and reproduction speed are set (T2220), and the variable restart setting process ends. In addition, the rewinding effect is performed once again at a fast reproduction speed in the display device 41, the effect before the interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. If the remaining variable time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2219 is "N"), the rewinding effect time is insufficient, so the display of the restart effect using the electric accessory and the setting of the accessory drive are performed (T2221 ), ending the variable restart setting process.

[Action and effect of the first embodiment]
Hereinafter, the effects of this embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 83 to 90. FIG. 83 to 90, the special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game are abbreviated as special figure 1 game and special figure 2 game, respectively.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays the identification information on the display device based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the results of the variable display game are displayed. is a predetermined result mode (hitting result mode including a small winning result mode and a big winning result mode), a predetermined game state (small winning state, big winning state) capable of giving a game value to a player can be generated.

The special figure 1 game processing as the first control means executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning the first start prize opening 36). control. The special figure 2 game processing as the second control means executes the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game) based on the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning to the second start winning opening 37) control.

Both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be in a state of being executed (execution state). Then, when one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game has a winning result mode (predetermined result mode), the other variation display game is terminated and the other variation is performed. The displayed game may be in the form of a losing result (FIGS. 39, 40, 42A, 42B). As a result, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be prevented from becoming a hit result mode. In addition, if both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are stopped in the winning result mode, the gaming machine 10 performs the winning operation related to one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. I can't run it, so I have a problem.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 83, the process (FIGS. 39, 40, 41A and 41B) of stopping the variation display of one of the variation display games in the win result mode (small win result mode in FIG. 83) is executed. At this time, it is possible to forcibly end the variable display of the other variable display game in a losing result mode (FIGS. 39, 40, 42A and 42B). This allows the other variable display game to continue as long as possible. In addition, the other variable display game is not newly started until the predetermined game state (minor win state, big win state) that occurs when one of the variable display games becomes a winning result mode is completed (special figure 1 in FIG. 21). Normal processing, special figure 2 normal processing in FIG. 22). As a result, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be prevented from becoming a hit result mode.

In addition, as in the time chart of FIG. 84, when one of the variation display games is in the winning result mode (small winning result mode in FIG. 84), the execution time (variation time) of the other variation display game is timed (measured). ), the other variable display game may be interrupted by stopping the updating of the special game processing timer (clocking means) (modifications of FIGS. 63, 64, 65 and 66). When the predetermined game state that occurs when one of the variable display games becomes a hit result mode ends, the other variable display game can be restarted by restarting the update of the special game processing timer (clocking means) (Fig. 63). , FIGS. 64, 67 to 69B). As indicated by the shaded area in FIG. 84, the other variable display game after resuming can be executed for the remaining variable time (remaining time of the timer) after the interruption.

In addition, since the other variation display game can be restarted even if it is interrupted, unlike the case where the game is forcibly stopped with a losing result mode, if the other variation display game results in a winning result, the other variation display game can be resumed after the restart. A predetermined game state (minor win state, big win state) can be generated by the display game, and a problem that the profit of the player is lost can be prevented. For example, if one variation display game derives a small win result mode while the other variation display game is being executed in a big win result mode, the other variation display game is interrupted, but the small win game by one variation display game is executed. When the state ends, the other variable display game can be resumed to derive the jackpot result aspect.

Furthermore, when executing the process of stopping the variable display of one variable display game in a hit result mode, the process of interrupting the variable display of the other variable display game is executed. can continue. If the identification information of the other variable display game is variably displayed while the other variable display game is suspended, the apparent variation can be continued, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The game control program (game control program) stored in the storage means (ROM 111b) of the game control means (game control device 100) includes main processing and timer interrupt processing for the main processing. Note that the present embodiment can be applied to other interrupt processing instead of timer interrupt processing. In the same timer interrupt process, the special figure 1 game process (first control means, first control process) has priority over the special figure 2 game process (second control means, second control process), and the special figure 1 game Special figure 2 game processing is executed after processing.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 85(a), when the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a hit result mode and interrupts the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 2 is performed in the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 64). Since the game processing timer cannot be updated, the special figure 2 game processing timer (timing means) that measures the execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is updated by the time (4 msec) for one interrupt cycle (step A8416 in FIG. 65 ). As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the restart of the fluctuation is executed extra for one time of the interruption period. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 85(b), when the timer is not updated, the total fluctuation time (t1 before interruption + t2 after interruption) is reduced by 1 of the interrupt cycle. The entire fluctuation time is increased by the time (4 msec) for one batch. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a hit result mode and interrupts the special figure 1 variation display game, there is no need to update the timer for measuring the execution time of the special figure 1 variation display game.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 86(a), the predetermined game state (small hit game state in FIG. 86) that occurs when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 86) is When ending, the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not delayed for a predetermined time (wait time) by a delay timer (delay means) (FIGS. 68 and 69B). On the other hand, as in the time chart of FIG. 86(b), when the predetermined game state that occurs when the special figure 1 variation display game is in the winning result mode ends, the special figure 2 variation display game is restarted by a delay timer ( delay means) for a predetermined time (waiting time of 8 msec) (S8621 in FIG. 67, S8814 in FIG. 69A). By setting the delay timer, the special figure 2 variation display game can be restarted simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 variation display game in timer interrupt processing after the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game.

Also, as in the time chart of FIG. 87 (a), regardless of the state of the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game (stopped state, apparent variation state during interruption, etc.), the special figure 2 variation display game A delay timer (8 msec wait time) may be set. As a result, in the timer interrupt processing for performing the end processing of the predetermined game state (hit end processing in FIGS. 53, 58, 67, and 69A) occurring when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the winning result mode, The special figure 2 fluctuation display game by special figure 2 game processing cannot be started (FIGS. 19 and 64). Then, if the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied in the timer interrupt processing after the end processing of the predetermined game state, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing are performed. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be started at the same time. In addition, at the timing of the end processing of the predetermined game state, if there is already a special figure 1 start memory and a special figure 2 start memory (in the case of accumulating the special figure 2 start memory), or the first start at this timing When there is a winning to the winning opening 36 and a winning to the second starting winning opening 37, the first starting condition and the second starting condition are established.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 87(b), when the special figure 2 variation display game is in the winning result mode, even if the delay timer is not set, the timer interrupt processing after the end processing of the predetermined game state is performed. Within, if the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are started at the same time by the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. can.

Furthermore, when one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game stops in a hit result mode, the remaining variation display game of the other variation display game A process corresponding to the variable time (the value of the special game process timer) may be performed (S8412 in FIG. 65). In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are finished at the same timing and the winning result is derived at the same time.

For example, based on the remaining variation time of the other variation display game, there is a possibility that the other variation display game ends at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the one variation display game that stops in a win result mode. (S8412 in FIG. 65). Specifically, in the special figure 2 game processing executed after the special figure 1 game processing for stopping the special figure 1 variation display game in a winning result mode, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game can be 0. It is determined whether or not (determines whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec in the special figure 1 fluctuating process).

In addition, when the special figure 2 variation display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variation display game stops in the winning result mode, the special figure 2 variation display game If the result mode is a hit result mode, in the special figure 1 game process (special figure 1 fluctuation processing in FIG. 65), suspend the special figure 2 fluctuation display game and postpone the stop of the fluctuation display. If the result mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the result mode, then in the special figure 2 game processing (especially the special figure 2 fluctuation processing in FIG. 66), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost in the result mode. Perform processing to stop.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 88(a), in a situation where both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may lead to a winning result at substantially the same time, the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted. interrupt processing for postponing the stop of the variable display. And derivation of the hit result of the special figure 1 variation display game is given priority, and the hit state (hit operation) by the special figure 1 variation display game starts first. After the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is derived (the apparent fluctuation display during interruption is stopped), and the hit state by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (hit Since the action) starts, the player is not disadvantaged. In addition, during the winning state (hit action) by the special figure 2 variation display game, even if there is a special figure 1 start memory (special figure 1 pending), the special figure 1 variation display game cannot be started (result of A3501 in FIG. 21 is “N”).

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 88(b), the special figure 2 variation display game ends at the same timing (within the same interrupt process) as the special figure 1 variation display game that derives the winning result (small hit here). In the case where there is a possibility, if the result mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the losing result mode, the process of stopping the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as it is in the losing result mode is performed. Even if this deviation result mode is derived as it is, no problem occurs. When performing the process of stopping the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the losing result mode, the stop display time of the losing result mode (the time from stopping until the losing result is determined) is set to the hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game If the game is set to be the same as the stop display time of the mode (the time from when the game is stopped until the winning result is determined (start of fanfare)), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 89 and 90, the game control device 100 (game control means), when a power failure occurs during interruption of the other variable display game and recovers from the power failure (turns on the power), After restoration (at the time of restoration or after restoration), before the execution control of one of the variable display games is started, the effect control device issues an interrupting command (interrupting command) indicating that the other variable display game is being interrupted. 300 (effect control means) (A1022 in FIG. 5B, B1305 in FIG. 73A). The production control device 300 can grasp that the other variable display game is being suspended and one of the variable display games is in a winning state (during a winning operation) by the suspension command, and the decoration special figure of the one variable display game can be grasped. Corresponding processing such as processing for displaying winning symbols on the display device 41 (see recovery screen display 1 in FIGS. 89 and 90) can be performed.

The effect control device 300 may display a restoration screen (power outage restoration display) suggesting restoration of the power outage on the display device 41 when the power outage is restored. Then, if the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed in the main display (first display) is interrupted, after the power failure is restored, a command related to the control of the suspended decoration special figure fluctuation display game You may exit the recovery screen when you receive (command). Commands related to the control of the decoration special figure variation display game include, for example, a variation command for starting the decoration special figure variation display game (see FIG. 89), a decoration special figure stop command for stopping the decoration special figure variation display game (see FIG. 90) and so on. When receiving a command related to the control of the decorative special figure variation display game on the side (reduced display side, second display side) displayed in a size different from the main display, the recovery screen is not terminated.

In the case of returning to the normal screen after finishing the recovery screen with the decorative special figure stop command, the default loose pattern may be used as the stop design. In the case of the winning stop symbol, the default winning symbol corresponding to the game value (the number of rounds, etc.) of the winning state may be used. The background of the normal screen may correspond to the probability state or the like.

There is a possibility of receiving a command related to the control of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game on the side other than the main display (reduced display side) before receiving the command related to the control of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game on the main display. However, if the recovery screen is terminated at that time, there is a possibility that a problem may occur. For example, even though it is in a low probability, if the recovery screen is ended and the normal screen is displayed in accordance with the start of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game that is displayed in a reduced size, the player will There is a risk of misidentification. Therefore, as shown in the recovery screen display 2 in FIGS. 89 and 90, even if a command regarding the start of a new variation of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game (here decoration special figure 2) that is displayed in a reduced size is received, simply fluctuation It just starts to display and doesn't exit the recovery screen.

Start memory means (for example, game control device 100) stores the right to execute the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game as start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition. Is possible. The starting memory display control means (for example, the segment LED editing process or the main process of FIG. 70) displays the number of starting memories stored in the starting memory means in a predetermined starting memory display area of the display device or indicator. It is possible to notify the player by doing so. Then, the effect control device 300 displays the number of starting memories and the variable display of the variable display game resumed after interruption in the recovery screen after recovery on the display device 41 normally (when the recovery screen is not being displayed). It may be displayed in a state with a higher degree of transparency than Note that if the apparent variable display is continued even during the interruption, the variable display that is continued during the interruption may also be displayed in a highly transparent state. Also, in the recovery screen, the fluctuation display displayed in the main display may be shake fluctuation.

[Second embodiment]
A gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, the embodiment (configuration) common to the first embodiment is applicable unless otherwise specified.

[Game board]
FIG. 91 is a front view of a game board 30 provided in the game machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 30a that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The center case 40 has an inflow port 40c to a warp passage 40a for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b in which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40a can roll. and are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the first starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 33, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b is the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable The prize winning device 33 makes it easy to win a prize. A lamp display device 80 is provided on the lower right side of the game area 32 . The lamp display device 80 displays the start memory number of each special figure variation display game.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 92) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided inside the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 92) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a first start winning port (first start winning area) 36 for giving the starting condition of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a normal variable winning device 33 directly below it. is provided. The normal variable winning device 33 is provided with a movable member 33c that converts into a state in which game balls can flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. When the movable member 33c is in the closed state, the game balls cannot win the normal variable winning device 33.例文帳に追加

In the second embodiment, unlike the prior art, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is executed by winning the winning opening (general electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33 It is configured to be stored. Therefore, the general electric prize opening (first starting prize area) is included in the category of the first start prize opening 36, and the general electric prize opening switch is included in the category of the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 92). That is, the general electric prize winning port and the first start prize winning port 36 correspond to a plurality of first start prize winning regions. It is configured as a normal variable prize winning device 33 having a movable member 33c that can be converted into a variable.

In the second embodiment, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls to convert the movable member 33c of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 33 between the open state and the closed state based on the predetermined lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. is connected to the general electric solenoid 33b (conversion control means) that performs the conversion (see FIG. 92). The movable member 33c of the normal variable winning device 33 is an attacker-type normal electric accessory that opens the normal electric winning opening by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the normal electric solenoid 33b. In addition, as the movable member 33c of the normal variable winning device 33, the movable member 33c is slid forward and backward by the normal electric solenoid 33b, so that the game ball can flow into the normal electric winning opening. You may provide an ordinary electric accessory. The game control device 100 rotates and opens the movable member 33c via the common electric solenoid 33b when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, and the game ball is displayed in the normal fluctuation winning device. 33 is changed to an open state in which the flow can flow.

In addition, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, or normal A time-saving state (general electric support (electricity support) state) is generated by making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the game state.

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40, a second start winning opening (second starting winning area) 37 for giving the start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. In addition, a first special variable winning device (lower large winning port) 38 is provided to the left of the second starting winning port 37, and a second special variable winning device (upper A large winning opening) 39 is provided.

In the second embodiment, the first special variable prize winning device (lower big prize winning opening) 38 moves forward and backward a sliding door (opening/closing member) 38c, which is a tongue-shaped member, to play the big prize winning opening. Transforms into a state where spheres can flow in (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-77362). The first special variable prize winning device 38 changes the state of the large prize winning port from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large prize winning port. is provided with a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The second special variable winning device (upper big winning opening) 39 has a movable member 39c that rotates in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, thereby converting the state into a state in which game balls can easily flow in. When the movable member 39c is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the special variable winning device 39.例文帳に追加The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the state of the large prize winning port from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper special prize winning port, thereby allowing the player to is provided with a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The game control device (game control means) 100 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined special result. In addition, in the second embodiment, the special game state includes a small win (first special game state) that can occur when a small win mode (first special result) occurs, and a big win mode (second special result). It includes a big hit (second special game state) that can occur when it becomes.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 1 based on the winning of the game ball to the general electric winning opening (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) It is possible to control the execution of a variable display game (first variable display game). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes first execution control means for performing such control.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes a special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second fluctuation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start prize opening (second start prize area) 37 control is possible. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes second execution control means for performing such control.

In addition, as will be described later, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the jackpot (second special game state), a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (hit probability is high probability, and It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed with general power support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes specific game state generating means for performing such control.

General winning port 35, first starting winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, normal variable winning device 33, first special variable winning device 38 big winning port, and second special variable winning device 39 big winning port When a game ball wins a prize, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 92) discharges a number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 according to the type of the winning prize opening. In addition, in the game area 32 below the normal variable prize winning device 33, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that do not win a prize such as a prize winning port is provided.

A ball guiding portion is provided on the upper right of the second special variable winning device 39 . The ball guide portion is a member that rolls the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the game area 32 in the horizontal direction and guides it to the second special variable winning device 39 and the like.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 59 for displaying information such as the current game state.

[Game control device]
FIG. 92 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control system of the game control device 100 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, an example of the configuration of the control system of the game control device 100 in the second embodiment will be described. Unless otherwise specified, the configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment, a gate switch 34a is provided for the game control device 100 of the first embodiment. Gate switch 34 is connected to interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 . The gate switch 34a detects winning to the normal figure starting gate 34. FIG. Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment, the normal electric solenoid 33b is provided with respect to the game control apparatus 100 of 1st Embodiment. The common solenoid 33b is connected to the first driver 138a.

Then, as will be described later, when the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the game control device 100 drives the general electric solenoid 33b to move the movable member 33c for a predetermined time. It is rotated (eg, for 0.3 seconds) to open and change to an open state in which game balls easily flow into the normal variable prize winning device 33 .

In addition, in the second embodiment, as described above, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning is executed by winning to the winning opening (general electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33 It has a configuration in which memory is stored. Therefore, the electric prize winning port switch is included in the category of the starting port 1 switch 36a.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in the second embodiment. FIG. 93 summarizes each game state, and shows the control by the game control device 100, the control by the effect control device 300, and the characteristics of the game state in each game state. In the second embodiment, the game state includes a normal game state, a first specific game state, a second specific game state, and a third specific game state.

First, each game state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be low and the general electric support (electric support) to be eliminated. Also, in the normal game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the normal mode. Also, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is recommended as the shooting direction. Therefore, since the main starting area becomes the first starting winning port 36, the main fluctuation special figure becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

In the first specific game state, the game control device 100 performs control so that the probability of winning (the probability of winning a special figure) is high, and there is general electric support (the number of times of support is 50 times). That is, in the first specific game state, it can be said that the conversion control by the general electric solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is controlled to be executed more than in the normal game state, and the probability state is set to the high probability state. .

Also, in the first specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the variable probability mode. Also, in the first specific game state, it is recommended that the shooting direction of the game ball is right-handed. Since it becomes easier to win the normal figure starting gate 34 by hitting to the right, the main starting area becomes the winning opening of the normal variable winning device 33 (normal electric winning opening). In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variation display game is executed by winning the general electric winning opening, the main variation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variation display game.

In the second specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be high, and the general electric support is eliminated. That is, when the transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state, the conversion control by the general electric solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is returned to the same control as the normal game state, and the special figure is set to the high probability state (FIG. 96).

Also, in the second specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to a small hit RUSH (rush). As will be described later, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set to a short time in the second specific game state, the small hit RUSH is likely to occur continuously in a short period of time. It can be said that many prize balls are obtained. Thus, in the second embodiment, when the second specific gaming state is executed, a small hit (first special result) is derived as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game) It is possible.

Also, in the second specific game state, it is recommended that the shooting direction of the game ball is right-handed. Therefore, the main starting area is the second starting winning port 37, and the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

In the third specific game state, the game control device 100 performs control so that the probability of winning (the probability of winning a special figure) is low, and there is general electric support (the number of times of support is 50 times). Also, in the third specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the time saving mode. Also, in the third specific game state, it is recommended that the shooting direction of the game ball is right-handed. Since it becomes easier to win the normal figure starting gate 34 by hitting to the right, the main starting area becomes the winning opening of the normal variable winning device 33 (normal electric winning opening). In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variation display game is executed by winning the general electric winning opening, the main variation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variation display game.

Next, the transition (transition) from each game state will be described. Assume that a big hit (second special game state) occurs in the normal game state. When the jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot state ends, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the first specific game state. On the other hand, when the jackpot is the normal jackpot in the normal game state, after the jackpot state ends, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the third specific game state.

When a normal jackpot occurs in the first specific game state, after the jackpot state ends, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the third specific game state. Further, when a variable probability big win occurs in the first specific game state, after the big win state ends, the game state shifts to the first specific game state again. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, when the general electric support ends without the occurrence of a big hit, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the second specific game state ("High support regulation in FIG. 93 The number of times" ends. Note that "high support" indicates a state with a high probability of hitting and with an electric support).

That is, in the first specific game state, as a transition condition to another game state, when the occurrence of a big hit (second special game state) is a condition (first transition condition), and a predetermined number of normal electric support (execution of the variable display game) may be set as a condition (second transition condition). By doing so, for example, after the occurrence of a big hit (second special game state) in the normal game state, the first specific game state can occur, but in this first specific game state, the above-mentioned When the second transition condition is established, the second specific game state can occur.

In the second specific game state, when the big win is a variable probability big win, after the big win state ends, the game state shifts from the second specific game state to the first specific game state. On the other hand, when the jackpot is the normal jackpot in the second specific game state, after the jackpot state ends, the game state shifts from the second specific game state to the third specific game state. That is, in the second specific game state, as a transition condition to another game state, the occurrence of a big hit (second special game state) is a condition.

When the variable probability big win occurs in the third specific game state, after the big win state ends, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the first specific game state. Also, when a normal jackpot occurs in the third specific game state, after the jackpot state ends, the game state shifts to the third specific game state again. On the other hand, in the third specific game state, when the general electric support ends without the occurrence of a big hit, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the normal game state (the "low support prescribed number of times" in FIG. 93 is End". Note that "low support" means a state in which the probability of winning is low and there is an electric support).

Since the game state shifts in this way, the game state can be shifted from the normal game state to the first specific game state after the variable probability big hit occurs in the normal game state. In the first specific game state, the electric power support is executed and the hit probability is set to a high probability, so that it is possible to easily generate a big hit. And the interest of a game can be improved.

Also, even if a big hit does not occur in the first specific game state, in the second embodiment, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the second specific game state. In the second specific game state, the general electric support is not executed, but by winning the second starting port 37, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed. Here, the small hit probability in the special figure 2 variation display game is set to a high probability unlike the special figure 1 variation display game (in FIG. 96 described later, the small hit probability is set to an extremely high probability). Therefore, in the second specific game state, it is possible to execute a "small win RUSH" mode in which small wins (first special game state) are frequently generated until the next big win occurs. Since the number of balls to be output can be increased in game states other than the big win (second special game state), it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with novel game characteristics.

Also, in the first specific game state, there is general electric support, and in the second specific game state, there is no general electric support as in the normal game state, so a small hit (first special game state) can be executed at a good tempo.

In addition, by executing the special figure variation display game in a state in which the probability of a big hit in the second specific game state is high, a big win (second special game state) occurs at an appropriate timing, and the player enters another game state. transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an extreme increase in payout balls due to excessive continuation of the second specific game state.

Each process in the second embodiment will be described below. Processing added in the second embodiment and processing that will be described again for ease of understanding are denoted by "A****" with numbers in the 10,000s after the symbol "A".

[Timer interrupt processing]
Timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program) in the second embodiment. FIG. 94 adds processing of step A11311 between steps A1311 and A1312 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A1301 to A1311 and the processing from steps A1312 to A1315 are the same as those in FIG. 6, so description thereof will be omitted.

At step A11311, the game control device 100 executes a normal pattern game process for performing a process related to the normal pattern fluctuation display game (A11311). Details of the general-purpose game processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 .

By doing so, in the second embodiment, it is possible to execute the normal pattern variation display game. Then, when the normal figure variation display game is in the winning mode, the special figure 1 variation display game is performed by opening the winning opening (general electric winning opening) of the normal varying winning apparatus 33 and winning the game ball in the normal electric winning opening. can be started.

In particular, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, general electric support is executed (see FIG. 93). In the first specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started frequently by the general electric support (electrical support), and the hit probability is high, so that the big hit is likely to occur. be able to. In addition, even in the third specific game state, it is possible to make the special figure 1 variable display game frequently occur easily by general electric support.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 95A is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 95A is obtained by adding the processing of step A13718 after step A3717 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A3701 to A3716 is the same as that in FIG. 23, so the description is omitted.

Compared to the special figure 1 fluctuation start process in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, the content of the high probability fluctuation number update process (A3717) is partially different, and a new time saving fluctuation number update process (A13718) is added. It is

High probability fluctuation frequency update process (A3717) is a process of managing the execution frequency of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state hit probability. Time reduction fluctuation frequency update processing (A13718) is a process of updating the time reduction fluctuation frequency, checking the end of general electricity support, etc., and setting necessary information. In addition, the details of the high-probability fluctuation count update process (A3717) and the time reduction fluctuation count update process (A13718) in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, respectively.

Thus, in the second embodiment, since the high probability fluctuation number update process (A3717) is executed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with a high support prescribed number of times.

In addition, in the second embodiment, since the time saving fluctuation number update process (A13718) is executed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, it is possible to shift to the normal game state with the low support prescribed number of times.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal processing of the second embodiment will be described. Figure 95B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in the second embodiment. FIG. 95B is obtained by adding the processing of step A13809 after step A3808 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A3801 to A3808 is the same as that in FIG. 24, so the description is omitted.

High probability fluctuation number update process (A3808) is a process of managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state hit probability. Time reduction fluctuation frequency update processing (A13809) is a process of updating the time reduction fluctuation frequency, checking the end of general electricity support, etc., and setting necessary information. In addition, the details of the high-probability fluctuation count update process (A3808) and the time reduction fluctuation count update process (A13809) in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, respectively.

Thus, in the second embodiment, since high probability fluctuation number update processing (A3808) is executed in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with a high support prescribed number of times.

In addition, in the second embodiment, since the time saving fluctuation number update process (A13809) is executed in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, it is possible to shift to the normal game state with the low support prescribed number of times.

FIG. 96 is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the losing probability, and the variable probability probability in the second embodiment. These tables show the big hit probability (the probability that the judgment result will be a big hit), the small hit probability (the probability that the judgment result will be a small hit), and the loss probability (the judgment result will be a loss). Probability to become), and probability variation probability (probability variation rush rate) are shown for the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. FIG. 96(a) shows the probability in the low-probability state, FIG. 96(b) shows the probability in the high-probability state, and FIG. 96(c) shows the probability variable inrush rate.

Also in the second embodiment, the jackpot probability (jackpot occurrence probability) is higher in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. Also, the small hit probability (probability of occurrence of a small hit) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure the small hit probability to be high in a high probability state and to be low in a low probability state. For example, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variation display game may be set to "0" in the low probability state. Also, the loss probability (probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a big hit mode (second special result) in the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) or the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game) is set to a low probability, and a high-probability state is set to a higher probability than the low-probability state.

In the second embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variation display in the special figure 2 variation display game. It is higher than the game, and the probability of losing is lower than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (in the high probability state, the probability of losing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is 0). Therefore, in the second specific game state, it is possible to generate a small hit with an extremely high probability by winning the second starting prize winning port 37 .

Also, as in FIG. 31 described above, in the low probability state, the second half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is long-term fluctuation (long fluctuation )become. However, in the high probability state, since the second half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not set, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a normal fluctuation time fluctuation (short fluctuation compared to long fluctuation) become. As a result, in the second specific game state of the high probability state, a small hit occurs more frequently due to the special figure 2 variation display game than in the low probability state, and a large number of prize balls due to the small hit can be obtained (small hit RUSH).

In the second embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, the variable probability state or the normal state. As shown in FIG. 96 (c), the 16R probability variable rush rate is 2% for both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the 4R probability variable rush rate is the special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 Both of the variable display games are 60%. That is, the probability variable inrush rate is set to 62%. Then, after the big hit is finished, the time saving of 50 rotations and the electric power support are executed.

In addition, as the 16R probability variable rush rate, for example, the special figure 1 variable display game is 2%, the special figure 2 variable display game is 40%, and the 4R probability variable rush rate is, for example, the special figure 1 variable display game is 60%, especially It may be set so that the distribution of the number of rounds of the big hit in the probability variable state of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is different, such as the figure 2 variation display game being 22%. With this configuration, if a variable probability big win is won in the small win RUSH mode, a large number of game balls can be obtained even during the big win game, so that more small wins are generated during the small win RUSH. In addition to improving the willingness to play the game of the player who intends to acquire the game ball by means of the game, the degree of expectation for winning the probability variable jackpot can also be improved.

In addition, since the occurrence of the variable probability big hit triggers the end of the small win RUSH mode, the occurrence of the variable probability big hit may reduce the player's willingness to play, but it is possible to acquire sufficient game balls even with this variable probability big hit. Therefore, while maintaining the player's desire to play, it is possible to impart a new desire to play to make the player enter the small winning RUSH again.

[High-probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in the second embodiment High probability fluctuation count update process (A3717 (special figure 1 fluctuation start process), A3808 (special figure 2 fluctuation start process)) Details will be explained. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the procedure of high-probability variation count update processing in the second embodiment. In the high-probability fluctuation number update process, the number of fluctuations of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high-probability state (here, the number of high-probability fluctuations as the number of remaining fluctuations) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A15101). If it is not in the high probability state (if it is in the low probability state) (the result of A15101 is "N"), the high probability fluctuation frequency update process is terminated.

If the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A15101 is "Y"), the high probability fluctuation count indicating the remaining number of special figure fluctuation display games to be started in the high probability state is updated by -1 (1 is subtracted) (A15102). In addition, the initial value of the number of high probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high probability state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process described later) ). Also, even if any of the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game starts to fluctuate, the high probability variation frequency is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A15103). When the high probability variation count is not 0 (the result of A15103 is "N"), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 determines the high probability variation count. End the update process. When the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (result of A15103 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding high probability & no time saving in the test signal output data area of RWM (A15104).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure high probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM (A15105), corresponding to the pattern (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that starts the fluctuation Set the high probability & short time no final fluctuation flag (A15106), and end the high probability fluctuation frequency update process. The high probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag will be described later.

Thus, by executing the high-probability fluctuation count update process in the second embodiment, the second specific game state (high probability , no electric sapo) (especially A15105).

[Time saving fluctuation number update process]
Next, the details of the time saving variation frequency update process (A13718 (special figure 1 variation start process)) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the time reduction variation count update process in the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is during time saving (state with low probability & electric support) (A15201). If it is not in the time saving (the result of A15201 is "N"), the time saving fluctuation number update process is terminated.

The game control device 100 updates the time saving fluctuation frequency by -1 (subtracts only 1) when it is in time saving (state with low probability & electric support) (result of A15201 is "Y") (A15202). In addition, the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations is the number of times of fluctuation in which the time-saving mode is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 jackpot end processing or special figure 2 in the second embodiment described later). jackpot end processing). Also, even if any of the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game starts to fluctuate, the time saving variation frequency is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A15203). If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A15203 is "N"), that is, if the time reduction mode continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 updates the number of time reduction fluctuations. finish. When the number of time saving fluctuations is 0 (the result of A15203 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding low probability & no time saving in the test signal output data area of RWM (A15204).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM (A15205), corresponding to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that starts the fluctuation Set the low probability & time saving no final fluctuation flag (A15206), and end the time saving fluctuation number update process.

In this way, by executing the time-saving fluctuation number update process in the second embodiment, the third specific game state (low probability, with electric sapo) Appropriately normal game state (low probability, no electric sapo) ) (especially A15205).

As mentioned above, in 2nd Embodiment, while changing a part of high probability fluctuation|variation frequency|count process in 1st Embodiment, the time-saving fluctuation|variation frequency|count update process was added. Therefore, as a flag corresponding to the high probability final variation flag in the first embodiment, the high probability & short time no final variation flag (A15106) and the low probability & short time no final variation flag (A15206) were introduced.

In order to deal with such changes, in the second embodiment, the "high probability final change?" be read as "Final fluctuation" is the final fluctuation at which the low probability and time saving state ends, and when the low probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the final fluctuation of the low probability and time saving state has ended. In addition, when the high probability & no time saving final variation flag is set, it shall be determined that the final variation of the high probability and time saving state has ended.

Further, in the second embodiment, "high probability?" in steps A2712, A3514, A3607, A5737, and A5837 in the first embodiment is replaced with "high probability or short working hours?".

Also, in the second embodiment, "clear the high probability fluctuation frequency area" in step A5907 in the first embodiment is read as "clear the high probability fluctuation frequency area and the short time fluctuation frequency area". Further, in the second embodiment, "clear the high-probability final fluctuation flag area" in step A5909 in the first embodiment is read as "clear the final fluctuation flag area".

In addition, the "final change flag area" is a high probability & no time saving final change flag area that stores a high probability & no time saving final change flag, and a low probability & no time saving final change flag that stores a low probability & no time saving final change. Contains the flag area.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
The details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a first flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment. Also, FIG. 100 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A16701), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A16702). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal (off data of jackpot 1 signal, off data of jackpot 3 signal) regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A16703).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16704). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16705). Here, in the second embodiment, there are high-probability data (high-probability, with power supply) and low-probability data (low-probability, with power supply) as probability variation determination data. If the probability fluctuation determination data is not low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo) ("N" in step A16705), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of high probability & short working hours in the external information output data area. (A16706). On the other hand, when the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo) ("Y" in step A16705), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A16720. Processing after step A16720 will be described later.

After the processing of step A16706, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16707). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A16708). After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal (firing position designation signal 1) regarding the instruction to hit to the right in the test signal output data area (A16709).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a number with a high probability in the game state display number area (A16710), saves a number with a right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (A16711), and saves a round LED pointer. Save the number of lights out in the area (A16712). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16713), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower grand winning opening fraud monitoring organization flag area (A16714), and the special figure status Clear the area (A16715).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16716). Thereby, in the first specific game state, it is possible to make the hit probability high and to perform the general electric support. And, in the first specific game state, it is possible to frequently execute the special figure 1 variable display game in a high probability state. Subsequently, save the initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations (for example, 50 times) in the high-probability fluctuation number area for holding the high-probability fluctuation number, and save the time-saving fluctuation number area for holding the time-saving fluctuation number. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16717). After that, save the probability information command (high probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16718), and set the special figure 2 game wait time value to the special figure 2 game Save in the processing timer area (A16719), and end the special figure 1 jackpot end processing.

In the above step A16705, if the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo) ("Y" in step A16705), the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding the start of low probability & time saving. Save in the external information output data area (A16720).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16721). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of low probability & short working hours in the test signal output data area (A16722). After that, the signal (firing position specifying signal 1) relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (A16723).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a low-probability number in the game state display number area (A16724), saves a right-handed number in the game state display number 2 area (A16725), and round LED pointer. Save the number of lights off in the area (A16726). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16727), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower grand winning opening fraud start period flag area (A16728), special figure status Clear the area (A16729).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16730). Thereby, in the 3rd specific game state, it is possible to execute the general electric support and the time saving mode. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be generated frequently. Subsequently, save the initial value of the number of low-probability fluctuations (for example, 50 times) in the low-probability fluctuation number area for holding the number of low-probability fluctuations, and save the time-saving fluctuation number area for holding the number of time-saving fluctuations. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16731). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16732), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is special figure 2 game processing Save in the timer area (A16733), and end the special figure 1 jackpot end processing.

By doing this, after the special figure 1 jackpot ends, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)), the probability of hitting It is possible to shift to the first specific game state by setting the probability to be high and by setting the general electric support as present. Also, after the special figure 1 jackpot ends, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo), set the hit probability to low probability and have normal electric support As, it is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
The details of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 is the first flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment. Also, FIG. 102 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number to return to the special figure 2 normal processing (A16801), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A16802). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the jackpot (OFF data of the jackpot 1 signal, OFF data of the jackpot 3 signal) in the external information output data area (A16803).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16804). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16805). Here, in the second embodiment, there are high-probability data (high-probability, with power supply) and low-probability data (low-probability, with power supply) as probability variation determination data. If the probability fluctuation determination data is not low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo) ("N" in step A16805), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving in the external information output data area. (A16806). On the other hand, when the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo) ("Y" in step A16805), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A16820. Processing after step A16820 will be described later.

After the processing of step A16806, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16807). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of high probability & short working hours in the test signal output data area (A16808). After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal (firing position designation signal 1) regarding the instruction to hit to the right in the test signal output data area (A16809).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the high probability number in the game state display number area (A16810), saves the right hitting number in the game state display number 2 area (A16811), and the round LED pointer. Save the number of lights out in the area (A16812). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16813), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower grand winning opening fraud monitoring organization flag area (A16814), and the special figure status Clear the area (A16815).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16816). Thereby, in the first specific game state, it is possible to make the hit probability high and to perform the general electric support. And, in the first specific game state, it is possible to frequently execute the special figure 1 variable display game in a high probability state. Subsequently, save the initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations (for example, 50 times) in the high-probability fluctuation number area for holding the high-probability fluctuation number, and save the time-saving fluctuation number area for holding the time-saving fluctuation number. saves the initial value (eg 50 times) of (A16817). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16818), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

In step A16805 described above, if the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo) ("Y" in step A16805), the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding the start of low probability & time saving. Save in the external information output data area (A16820).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16821). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of low probability & short working hours in the test signal output data area (A16822). After that, the signal (firing position designation signal 1) relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (A16823).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a low-probability number in the game state display number area (A16824), saves a right-handed number in the game state display number 2 area (A16825), and round LED pointer. Save the number of lights out in the area (A16826). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16827), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower grand winning opening fraud start period flag area (A16828), and the special figure status Clear the area (A16829).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16830). Thereby, in the 3rd specific game state, it is possible to execute the general electric support and the time saving mode. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be generated frequently. Subsequently, save the initial value of the number of low-probability fluctuations (for example, 50 times) in the low-probability fluctuation number area for holding the number of low-probability fluctuations, and save the time-saving fluctuation number area for holding the number of time-saving fluctuations. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16831). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16832), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

By doing so, after the special figure 2 jackpot ends, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)), the probability of hitting It is possible to shift to the first specific game state by setting the probability to be high and by setting the general electric support as present. Also, after the special figure 2 jackpot, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo), the hit probability is set to low probability and there is a general electric support , can be shifted to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 103 is obtained by adding the processing of step A17207 between steps A7207 and A7208 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processing from steps A7208 to A7210 are the same as those in FIG. 58, so description thereof will be omitted.

At step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during working hours (A17207). Then, when determining that the game control device 100 is not in the time saving mode (the result of A17207 is "N"), the processing after step A7208 is executed. On the other hand, when it is during working hours (the result of A17207 is "Y"), the process after step A7210 is performed.

By doing so, when the hit probability is not in the high probability state and the time is not in the time saving state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 104 is obtained by adding the processing of step A17308 between steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A7301 to A7308 and the processing from steps A7309 to A7310 are the same as those in FIG. 59, so description thereof will be omitted.

At step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during working hours (A17308). And game control control equipment 100, when it decides that it is not in time saving (the result of A17308 is "N"), executes the processing after step A7309.On the other hand, when it is in time saving (result of A17308 is "Y") , To end the special figure 2 small hit end processing.

By doing so, when the hit probability is not in the high probability state and the time is not in the time saving state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing (modification in the second embodiment)]
A modification of the second embodiment of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 105 is a first flow chart showing a modification of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment. Also, FIG. 106 is a second flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment.

105 and 106 are obtained by adding processing from steps A19719 to A19723 and processing from steps A19733 to A19737 to the processing in FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A16701 to A16718 and from steps A16720 to A16732 are the same as those in FIGS. 99 and 100, and description thereof will be omitted.

At step A19719, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (A19719). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of A19719 is "N"), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19722), special figure The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19723), and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of A19719 is "Y"), directs the decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (A19720), and effect command setting processing is executed (A19721). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. After that, the above-mentioned steps A19722 and A19723 are executed, and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is ended.

Moreover, in step A19733, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (A19733). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of A19703 is "N"), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19736), special figure The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19737), and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of A19733 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (A19734), and effect command setting processing is executed (A19735). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. After that, the above-mentioned steps A19736 and A19737 are executed, and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is ended.

Figures 105 and 106 can be said to be a modification of the modification of the special figure 1 jackpot end process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modification of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect in the second embodiment is obtained. That is, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric sapo)) after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot, the hit probability is set to high probability. It is possible to move to the first specific game state with general electric support. In addition, after the special figure 1 jackpot, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is low probability data (low probability, with electric sapo), set the hit probability to low probability and have normal electric support , can be shifted to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing (modification in the second embodiment)]
A modification of the second embodiment of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 107 is a first flow chart showing a modification of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process in the second embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 108 is the 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 jackpot end process in 2nd Embodiment.

107 and 108 are obtained by adding processing from steps A19819 to A19722 and processing from steps A19833 to A19836 to the processing in FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A16801 to A16818 and from steps A16820 to A16832 are the same as in FIGS.

At step A19819, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (A19819). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of A19819 is "N"), clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area where the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19822), special figure 2. End the jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of A19819 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (A19820), and effect command setting processing is executed (A19821). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, the processing of the above-mentioned step A19822 is executed, and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

At step A19833, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (A19833). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of A19833 is "N"), clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area where the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19836), special figure 2. End the jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of A19833 is "Y"), produces a decoration special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game. It is prepared as a command (A19834), and effect command setting processing is executed (A19835). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, the process of step A19836 described above is executed, and the special figure 2 jackpot end process is ended.

Figure 107 and Figure 108, it can be said that the modification of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing in the first embodiment is modified so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modification of special figure 2 jackpot end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect in the second embodiment is obtained. That is, after the special figure 2 jackpot, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with general electric support)), the probability of hitting is set to high probability. With electric support, it is possible to shift to the first specific game state. Also, after the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is low probability data (low probability, with general electricity support), the probability of hitting is set to low probability, and there is general electricity support, It is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 1 small hit end process (variant example)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process according to the modification. FIG. 109 is obtained by adding the processing of step A17207 between steps A7207 and A7208 in FIG. 69A. Therefore, the processing from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processing from steps A7208 to S8814 are the same as those in FIG. 69A, so description thereof will be omitted.

At step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during working hours (A17207). Then, when determining that the game control device 100 is not in the time saving mode (the result of A17207 is "N"), the processing after step A7208 is executed. On the other hand, if it is during the time saving (the result of A17207 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step S8810.

FIG. 109 can be said to be a modification of the modification of the special figure 2 small hit end process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modification of the special figure 2 small hit end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect is obtained. That is, by the above processing, when the hit probability is not in the high probability and the time is not in the short time, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing according to the modification. FIG. 110 is obtained by adding the processing of step A17308 between steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG. 69B. Therefore, the processing from steps A7301 to A7308 and the processing from steps A7309 to S8914 are the same as those in FIG. 69B, so description thereof will be omitted.

At step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during working hours (A17308). Then, when determining that the game control device 100 is not in the time saving mode (the result of A17308 is "N"), the processing after step A7309 is executed. On the other hand, if it is during the time saving (the result of A17308 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A8911.

FIG. 109 can be said to be a modification of the modification of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modification of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect is obtained. That is, by the above processing, when the hit probability is not in the high probability state and the time is not in the time saving state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A11310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal game processing. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A17601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 monitors the input from the general electrical winning opening switch that detects the winning (entering the ball) to the winning opening (general electrical winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. (A17602). It should be noted that, in the second embodiment, unlike the prior art, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored by winning to the general electric winning opening. Therefore, the general electric prize-winning port is included in the category of the first starting prize-winning port 36, and the general electric prize-winning port switch is included in the category of the starting port 1 switch 36a. The details of the general electric winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (subtracts only 1) (A17603). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A17604).

The game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A17604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the normal game processing number A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referenced for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A17605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A17606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general-purpose game processing number, and the game branch processing corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number is executed (A17607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A17607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the effect, To perform normal pattern normal processing, such as setting of information necessary for performing processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A17608). The details of the normal pattern normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 .

In addition, when the game processing number is "1" at step A17607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern fluctuation processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern display processing ( A17609). The details of the processing during normal pattern fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 .

Further, when the game processing number is "2" in step A17607, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 The setting of opening time and the processing during the normal diagram display that performs the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the normal diagram per is executed (A17610). The details of the processing during normal map display will be described later with reference to FIG. 117 .

Further, if the game processing number is "3" at step A17607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during normal game winning, or sets information necessary for performing normal electric remaining ball processing. The figure hit middle process is executed (A17611). The details of the processing during normal per figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 .

In addition, when the game processing number is "4" at step A17607, the game control device 100 executes normal electric remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern per end processing (A17612 ). The details of the normal figure remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 .

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" at step A17607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern per end processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern normal processing (A17608). (A17613). The details of the end processing per normal pattern will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 .

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device 53 (A17614). After that, the symbol variation control processing relating to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A17615), and the normal symbol game processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A17604 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up, executes the processing after step A17614.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A17601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A17701). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A17701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is for hitting to the right (A17702). Here, the right-handed game state is a jackpot state, a first specific game state, a second specific game state, and a third specific game state. If the game state is to hit to the right (the result of A17702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A17705. If the game state is not right-handed (result of A17702 is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A17703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A17704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command executes notification (warning) instructing to hit left-handed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the normal pattern reservation number and determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A17705). Game control device 100, when the number of normal pattern reservations is less than the upper limit (the result of A17705 is "Y"), updates the number of normal pattern reservations by +1 (A17706), corresponds to the number of normal pattern reservations after updating Then, the address of the random number storage area is calculated (A17707). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A17708), the winning design random number is extracted and saved in the winning design random number storage area (A17709), and the gate switch monitoring process ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A17701 is "N"), or if it is determined that the number of normal pattern reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A17705 is " N") to end the gate switch monitoring process.

[General electric winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general/universal electric prize switch monitoring process (A17602) in the general/universal diagram game process will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general electric winning switch monitoring process. In addition, as described above, the general electric prize winning opening switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 92).

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, whether or not the normal pattern variation display game is in a winning state and the normal variation prize winning device 33 is executing opening operations a predetermined number of times. (A17801). Then, when it is in the middle of the general pattern hit (the result of A17801 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the general electrical winning opening switch (A17802). If there is an input to the general electric prize winning opening switch (the result of A17802 is "Y"), the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (A17803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the count number of the general electric counter after the update has reached the upper limit (for example, 6) (A17804). Then, when the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A17804 is "Y"), the hit end pointer value (for example, 4 or 7) is loaded from the normal hit end pointer area in the RWM, Save in the control pointer area during the normal map hit (A17805).

Finally, the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared (A17806), and the general-purpose electric winning switch monitoring processing is terminated. That is, when there is a general electric winning prize equal to or greater than the upper limit value during the winning state of the general pattern, the winning end value is saved in the processing control pointer area during the general pattern winning at that time, and the normal variable winning device 33 is closed. It is made to end the hit state of the normal figure on the way.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the middle of the normal game (the result of A17801 is "N"), if it is determined that there is no input to the normal electric winning opening switch (the result of A17802 is "N") ), or if it is determined that the number of counts has not reached the upper limit (the result of A17804 is "N"), the electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (A17608) in the general-purpose game processing will be described. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general/universal figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations is 0 (A17901). If the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A17901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per general pattern of RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per general pattern of RWM. Load the per pattern random number from (for the number of reservations 1), and clear the general per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and the general per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) after loading to 0 (A17902 ). In addition, whether the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is higher than normal (in a high probability state), that is, whether it is in a short time state (normal support state) (A17903). In addition, the probability per normal pattern in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per normal pattern in the low probability is 0/251.

When the game control device 100 is not in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A17903 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern low probability (A17904). , If it is in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A17903 is "Y"), set the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 1) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern high probability (A17905), step A17906 Go to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A17906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during normal pattern high probability and during normal pattern low probability. If the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A17906 is "Y"), that is, if the win is lost, the process proceeds to step A17908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A17906 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A17907).

When the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A17907 is "Y"), that is, in the case of losing, the game control device 100 saves the losing information in the winning flag area (A17908). Furthermore, the losing stop pattern number is set as the normal stop symbol number (A17909), the losing pattern information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A17910), and the process proceeds to step A17914.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A17907 is "N"), that is, if it is a winning, the game control device 100 saves the winning information in the winning flag area (A17911), and loads the loaded winning symbol random number. The corresponding winning stop design number is set (A17912), the winning stop design information corresponding to the winning stop design number is saved in the normal design stop design information area (A17913), and the process proceeds to step A17914. In addition, there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and in this embodiment, there are three (1 per normal pattern, 2 per normal pattern, 3 per normal pattern).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal pattern stop symbol area (A17914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A17915), and shifts the normal per pattern random number storage area. (A17916), after clearing the empty area after the shift to 0 (A17917), update the number of general chart reservations by -1 (A17918).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the positions of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 are advanced one by one. By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A17919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the general pattern game processing timer area (A17920). For example, the variable time is divided into 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. And, during normal figure fluctuation processing transition setting processing is executed (A17921), normal figure usual processing ends. It should be noted that the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (the result of A17901 is "Y"), sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal pattern normal process (A17922). , the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A17923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A17924), and the general pattern normal processing is terminated.

[Normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process]
FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process during normal pattern fluctuation. The process shift setting process during the normal pattern fluctuation is executed at step A17921 in the normal pattern normal process shown in FIG. 114 .

First, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the processing number for shifting to the normal pattern fluctuation processing (A18101), and saves the processing number in the normal pattern game processing number area (A18102).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (turns on the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A18103), and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating. The fluctuation flag indicating that is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area (A18104). Then, save the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the timer for the flashing cycle of the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern flashing control timer area (A18105), and save the initial value in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern number area (here 0) is saved (A18106). After that, the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation is terminated.

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the details of the processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A17609) in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "2" as the setting processing for shifting to the processing during normal game display (A18301), and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A18302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal pattern display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game on the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern game processing timer area (A18303). .

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the normal pattern fluctuation (turns off the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A18304). Then, the stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (A18305), and the normal pattern fluctuation process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (A17610) in the general-purpose map game processing will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during normal map display.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process (A18401), and clears the hit flag area of RWM (A18402). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information is set in the loaded winning flag (A18403).

The game control device 100, when the winning information is set in the winning flag (the result of A18403 is "Y"), sets the processing setting table during the winning (A18404), and the winning corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information A start pointer value (here, a value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per normal pattern) is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during normal pattern per pattern (A18405). In addition, the hit end pointer value corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, 3 per normal pattern) is acquired and saved in the end pointer area per normal pattern (A18406). Next, the general electric opening time corresponding to the general pattern stop pattern information (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per general pattern) is acquired and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A18407). By the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variable prize winning device 33 is set during the variable probability state or during the time saving state (during the general electricity support state), and for example, it is possible to open 3 times or 2 times.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the process number for shifting to the normal game per process (A18408), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A18409). After that, save the signal related to the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern 1 hit signal is turned on) and the signal related to normal electric operation start (normal electric accessory 1 active signal is turned on) in the test signal output data area (A18410). Furthermore, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common solenoid 33b, ON data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (A18411).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information in the general electric count number area that stores the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 33 (A18412), Clears the stored information in the electric fraudulent winning number area (A18413). Finally, a flag that defines the non-fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 33 is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A18414).

The game control device 100, when the winning information is not set in the winning flag (the result of A18403 is "N"), sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal pattern normal processing (A18415). , the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A18416). After that, save the during fraud monitoring period flag in the common electricity fraud monitoring period flag area (A18417), and end the processing during the general map display.

[Medium processing per normal figure]
Next, the details of the processing (A17611) during the normal pattern per game in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during normal per pattern.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal pattern hit (A18601), and the value of the loaded normal pattern middle control pointer is the value of the normal pattern hit middle control pointer upper limit value area (hit end value) is reached (A18602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer during normal per pattern has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during normal per pattern (result of A18602 is "N"), control during per normal per pattern The pointer is updated by +1 (A18603). Furthermore, normal electric operation transition setting processing is executed (A18604), and processing during the normal pattern per is ended. The details of the normal electric operation transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (the value of the end of the hit) (the result of A18602 is "Y"), Without executing the process of updating (+1) the process control pointer area during the normal pattern hit in step A18603, the normal electric operation transition setting process is executed (A18604), and the process during the normal pattern hit ends.

[General electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (A18604) in the normal per normal process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. The normal electric operation shift setting process is a process of controlling the driving of the normal electric solenoid 33b for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 33, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the processing according to the value of the control pointer (A18701). Here, the control pointer uses the value before being updated in step A18603. If the value of the control pointer is any one of 0, 2, and 5, the normal variable winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer is moved to the processing of step A18702 to control closing of the normal variable winning device 33. The wait time (for example, 300 msec) after closing is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A18702).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets OFF data in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 33b (A18703), and ends the general electric operation transition setting process.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A18704 and controls the opening of the normal variable winning device 33. The normal electric open time (for example, 1700 msec), which is the open time of the normal variable winning device 33, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A18704). Furthermore, in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 33b, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area (A18705), and the general electric operation shift setting process is terminated.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is 6, the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A18706 and controls the opening of the normal variable winning device 33. Therefore, the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer 33 open time (for example, 2600 msec) is saved in the general/universal game processing timer area (A18706). Furthermore, in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 33b, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area (A18707), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Furthermore, when the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A18708, terminates the opening control of the normal variable winning device 33, and performs the normal electric remaining ball processing ( A17612), set "4" as the processing number (A18708), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A18709).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (A18710). After that, in order to set the general electric solenoid 33b to OFF, the OFF data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (A18711), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

[Public electric residual bulb treatment]
Next, the details of the general electric remaining ball processing (A17612) in the general electric game processing will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric residual bulb processing.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number "5" relating to the end process for a normal game (A18901), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A18902). After that, the general pattern ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A18903).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the operation of the normal variable winning device 33 (turns off the signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1) in the test signal output data area (A18904). Subsequently, the general electrical count area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 33 is cleared (A18905), and the control pointer area during the general pattern is cleared (A18906). After that, the end pointer area per normal figure is cleared (A18907), and the normal electric remaining ball processing is terminated.

[End processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the general pattern per end process (A17613) in the general pattern game process will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the per-universal pattern end process.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number "0" relating to the normal game process (A19101), and further saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A19102). After that, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal pattern variation game (the signal during normal pattern 1 hit is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A19103).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves the flag (during fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 33 in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A19104), and then, the normal per pattern end process. exit.

[Action and effect of the second embodiment]
The effects of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 122 is a time chart of the operation of the first special variable winning device 38 in the small hit RUSH. In FIG. 122, in order to explain the operation of the first special variable winning device 38 in the second specific game state, the execution state and stop state of the special figure 2 variation display game (described as "special figure 2 game"), The execution state of the small winning operation, the opening/closing state of the lower big winning opening (winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38), and the state of the game ball in the vicinity of the opening/closing door of the lower big winning opening are shown.

In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, when generating a small win (first special game state), the sliding door (opening/closing member) 38c of the first special winning device 38 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Convert. The first special winning device 38 has a configuration in which the game ball stays on the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c when the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c is in the closed state. Furthermore, when the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c is in an open state, the game ball staying on the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c can win. As a result, even if the open state is short, even if the game ball stays in the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c, the game ball stays in the first special prize winning device 38, so that many game balls can win the second prize. It has a configuration that can efficiently increase the number of paid balls in the specific game state.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the small hit RUSH described above occurs in the second specific game state, the variation is started each time the second start winning opening 37 is won. As shown in FIG. 96 described above, even if it is a low probability state or a high probability state, the small hit probability of special figure 2 is set extremely high, and special figure 2 is set in the second specific game state The fluctuation of the fluctuation display game is set to short fluctuation. Therefore, small winning operations will occur one after another.

When a small win occurs, the big winning opening is opened a plurality of times (for example, 8 times) for each small win. During the small winning operation (first special game state), the open state time of the lower big winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is set shorter than the closed state time. For example, while the closing time of the lower prize-winning opening is 1.2 seconds, the opening time can be set to 0.2 seconds.

The special variable winning device unit that constitutes the first special variable winning device 38 has a configuration in which the downward force of game balls on the opening/closing door 38c is weakened (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-77362). As a result, game balls tend to stay on the opening/closing door 38c.

In such a configuration, when a small win RUSH occurs with a high frequency of small wins, the closed state time of the lower big prize winning port is set longer than the open state time, so that the closed state time is increased. of game balls can be retained on the opening/closing door 38c. After that, the opening/closing door 38c is opened, so that many game balls staying on the opening/closing door 38c are awarded to the lower prize winning opening at once. As a result, when a small hit RUSH occurs, a large number of prize balls can be awarded to the player.

By doing so, in the variable probability loop type gaming machine 10 as in the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a small hit RUSH in the second specific game state after exiting the first specific game state. , a new game property can be realized in which the more the game balls are fitted, the more game balls can be acquired.

Incidentally, referring to FIG. 122, when a small win occurs in a predetermined variation display game and a small win occurs in the next variation display game after this predetermined variation display game, in the next variation display game It is possible to secure a period for securing the flowing down and staying state of the game ball by the period of change of the identification information. As a result, when the small winning action continues for two games, the game ball can be retained on the opening/closing door 38c by utilizing the fluctuation time of the subsequent game. Then, many game balls staying on the opening/closing door 38c are made to be awarded at once to the lower prize winning opening, and many prize balls can be given to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, after the big win (second special game state) is over, when the variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific game state, a small win mode ( Since the transition is made to the second specific game state from which the first special result) can be derived, it is possible to perform novel game state transitions that have not existed in the past. Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is possible to efficiently vary the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game) in which many small hits are allocated.

[Third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 138. FIG. It should be noted that configurations common to those of the first embodiment can be applied to configurations not described in the third embodiment.

Also, the third embodiment is directed to the game board 30 of FIG. 2 (excluding modifications described later). Then, when one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a winning result, the other variation display game is forcibly terminated with a losing result. The same is true for suspension/resume instead of forced termination.

In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 start memory, second start memory, special figure 2 pending) is larger than 1 upper limit (for example, 4) Configuration that accumulates However, the special figure 2 start winning during the special figure 2 fluctuation display game execution and the big hit is not invalidated. For this reason, special figure start mouth 2 switch processing, special figure 2 usual processing, and fluctuation start information setting processing are changed from the first embodiment as follows.

[Special figure start gate 2 switch processing]
FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes a special figure starting opening 2 switch process (A2718) in the starting opening switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 loads the starting port 2 signal output count, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 37a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 (A3001). Further, the value of the loaded start port 2 signal output count is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A3003).

If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start port 2 signal output number area of RWM (A3004). On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the process of step A3015 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the update target special figure 2 holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A3015). If the special figure 2 pending number is not less than the upper limit (the result of A3015 is "N"), end the special figure start port 2 switch process.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 reservation number is less than the upper limit (the result of A3015 is "Y"), sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3016), the special figure 2 reservation number +1 Update (A3017). It should be noted that the special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting the variation information (including sorting of the look-ahead variation pattern).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the special figure 2 random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (A3018), stores the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process as the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (A3019). Subsequently, the jackpot pattern random number is extracted and prepared (A3020), and the jackpot pattern random number is saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A3021). Further, a small winning design random number is extracted and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (A3022). Next, save the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas of the RWM (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) ( A3023).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure reservation information determination process (prefetching process, advance determination process) for determining special figure reservation information (A3024), and the number of decoration special figure 2 reservations indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations Prepare a command (decorative special figure 2 reservation number command) as a production command (A3025), execute the production command setting process (A3026), and end the special figure start port 2 switch process. Thus, when the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory) occurs, the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

In the third embodiment, the special figure reservation information determination process is also executed for the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37 Become. Therefore, the prefetching pattern system command (prefetching stop symbol command) and the prefetching variation system command (prefetching variation pattern command) for the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 reservation) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. .

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 normal processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 normal process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process. In addition, the processing other than steps A3605a and A3605b is the same as the special figure 2 usual processing (FIG. 22) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

After the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3605), the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3605a). , effect command setting processing is executed (A3605b).

Therefore, in the third embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the fluctuation start information setting process (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. Processing other than steps A5021, A5022, and A5023 is the same as the variation start information setting processing (FIG. 36) of the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is "N"), that is, if the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 pending number is updated by -1 ( A5021), shift the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A5022), clear the empty area after the shift (A5023), and end the fluctuation start information setting process.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It should be noted that the processing other than A4308a-1 is the same as the special figure 1 stop design setting processing (FIG. 29A) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

After step A4308a, in step A4308a-1, save special figure 1 production mode transition information and special figure 2 production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state. Thereby, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information after the end of the big hit (jackpot state) as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game are set. That is, based on the current probability state (high probability state or normal game state (low probability state)) and the big hit pattern, the special figure 1 production mode and the special figure 2 production mode after the big hit by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. etc. will be set.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It should be noted that the processing other than A4308b-1 is the same as the special figure 2 stop design setting processing (FIG. 29B) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

After step A4308a, in step A4308b-1, save special figure 1 production mode transition information and special figure 2 production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state. As a result, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information after the end of the big hit (jackpot state) as a result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are set. That is, based on the current probability state (high probability state or normal game state (low probability state)) and the big hit pattern, the special figure 1 production mode and the special figure 2 production mode after the big hit by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game etc. will be set.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In addition, the processing other than A4402 is the same as the special figure 1 information setting processing (FIG. 30) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

In step A4402, unlike the first embodiment, the game control device 100 sets the variation pattern selection information table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode information. Therefore, if it is not a high probability state (probability variable state), that is, in the case of the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) is the special figure 1 effect including the special figure 1 effect mode number It will be set according to the mode information. In this embodiment, the variation pattern, which is the variation mode, particularly includes information on variation time. The details of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game will be described later (Fig. 137(B)). In addition, as will be described later, the special figure 1 effect mode information (especially the special figure 1 effect mode number) changes according to the number of executions of the special figure 1 variation display game (the number of fluctuations, the number of rotations, the number of games), The variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set according to the number of executions of the special figure 1 variation display game.

[Tokuzu 2 information setting process]
FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It should be noted that the processing other than the step A4502 and the added step A4506a is the same as the special figure 2 information setting processing (FIG. 31) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

In step A4502, unlike the first embodiment, the game control device 100 sets the variation pattern selection information table corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode information. Therefore, in the case of a high probability state (definite variable state), the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game) is set according to the special figure 2 production mode information including the special figure 2 production mode number. will be In this embodiment, the variation pattern, which is the variation mode, particularly includes information on variation time.

In addition, in the normal game state, the second half offset data for long time fluctuation (A4507) makes the special figure 2 fluctuation display game a long fluctuation (long fluctuation time) fluctuation pattern, compared to the long fluctuation (long fluctuation time), in the high probability state, The variation display game in FIG. 2 basically has a variation pattern of short variation (short variation time, eg, 1 sec). However, even in a high probability state, if reach occurs, and in the case of a high probability final fluctuation (final fluctuation in a high probability state), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a long medium compared to short fluctuation It becomes a variable time (for example, 20 sec). Medium fluctuation times should be shorter than long fluctuations (eg 10 minutes). The details of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game will be described later (Fig. 137(B)).

In step A4506a, after step A4505 or A4506, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 effect mode number is the special mode number (specific number 50 here). When the special figure 2 effect mode number is the special mode number (specific number 50 here) (the result of A4506a is "Y"), the game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure 2 effect mode information in step A4502. Set the fluctuation pattern selection information table. As will be described later, the special figure 2 effect mode information (especially the special figure 2 effect mode number) changes according to the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game (the number of fluctuations, the number of rotations, the number of games), so the special figure The variation pattern of the 2-variation display game is set according to the number of executions of the special figure 2-variation display game.

In addition, the game control device 100, only when the special figure 2 effect mode number is not the number of the special mode (specific number 50 here) (the result of A4506a is "N"), the long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Set the second half offset data (A4507). Therefore, as will be described later, until the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game after the end of the probability variation state (ST) is within a predetermined number, the special figure 2 variation display game is a long variation (long variation time, For example, 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern is not set, and a short fluctuation (short fluctuation time, for example, 1 sec) fluctuation pattern is set. In addition, here, the predetermined number of times is the upper limit value "4" of the special figure 2 reservation number or the special figure 2 reservation number at the time of the probability variation end.

As a result, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the normal game state, the special figure based on the winning to the second start winning port 37 in the variable probability state (specific game state) (satisfaction of the second start condition) A short-time variation pattern can be set for the 2 variation display game, that is, for the special figure 2 variation display game based on the special figure 2 start memory (second start memory) that occurred during the variable probability state. .

Temporarily, in the normal game state after the end of the probability variable state (small hit RUSH state), a long-time fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) for the special figure 2 variation display game based on the special figure 2 start memory that occurred during the probability variation state is set, the player stops the game and leaves the gaming machine 10, and there is a possibility that the big hit of this special figure 2 variable display game will occur in an unattended state (occurrence possibility of an unmanned big hit). , a problem arises such as a disadvantage to the player. However, by setting a short-time variation pattern for the special figure 2 variation display game based on the special figure 2 start memory generated during the variable probability state, the occurrence of unmanned jackpot can be reduced.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 displaying process (second half) according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 displaying process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process. It should be noted that the processing other than steps A5743a, A5753a-A5753e is the same as the special figure 1 display processing (FIG. 43) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit, the game control device 100, after step A5743, performs a special figure 1 effect related to the setting of the special figure 1 effect mode, which is the effect mode related to the special figure 1 variation display game. Mode information check processing is executed (A5743a), and processing shift setting processing during special figure 1 small fanfare is executed (A5744). Also, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 effect mode information check process after step A5753 even when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a loss (A5753a). The details of the special figure 1 effect mode information check process will be described later.

After step A5753a, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 switching preparation remaining rotation number (special figure 1 switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the special figure 1 production mode number (A5753b), and special figure 1 production It is determined whether or not the remaining number of rotations (special figure 1 effect remaining game number) and the remaining number of rotations for special figure 1 switching preparation match (A5753c). In addition, the special figure 1 switching preparation remaining number of rotations may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the production modes of the plurality of special figure 1 production modes, or the plurality of special figure 1 production modes It may be the same value (number of rotations) in any production mode, or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all production modes of the plurality of special figure 1 production modes.

When the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed and the special figure 1 switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (the result of A5753c is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A5754.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the special figure 1 production remaining rotation speed and the special figure 1 switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (the result of A5753c is "Y"), the special figure 1 production mode switching preparation command is the production command (A5753d), effect command setting processing (A5753e) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step A5754. The special figure 1 production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a specific production such as a look-ahead production from several rotations before the special figure 1 production mode switches (before several games), and the production control device 300 By receiving the special figure 1 production mode switching preparation command as a command for switching the production mode, it is possible to avoid contradictions in production across multiple special figure 1 production modes (single-shot system command processing B1317, B1318).

Alternatively, in step A5753b, the total switching preparation remaining rotation number (total switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the special figure 1 production mode number is set, and in step A5753c, the total production remaining rotation number (total production remaining game number ) and the total switching preparation remaining rotation speed match or not. In this way, the effect control device 300, before the number of games the total effect remaining rotation becomes zero and shifts from the probability variable state to the normal game state, by receiving the special figure 1 effect mode switching preparation command prefetch effect. It can be prohibited (B1317, B1318 of single command processing). In addition, the total production remaining rotation number is the remaining number of rotations until the production mode change regarding the total number of rotations (the number of executions) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

[Special figure 1 effect mode information check process]
Figure 131 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 production mode information check processing which relates to 3rd execution form. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 effect mode information check process (A5743a, A5753a) in the special figure 1 displaying process. Incidentally, the special figure 1 effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is other than the big hit (small hit or loss).

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure primary mode transition information is a no-update code (A20101). If the special figure primary mode transition information is no update code (the result of A20101 is "Y"), the special figure 1 effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the special figure 1 production mode is not changed according to the number of executions of the executed special figure 1 variable display game, and for example, the special figure 1 production mode in which the high probability state continues until the next big hit. is selected.

In addition, when the special figure primary mode transition information is not a no-update code (the result of A20101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines that the special figure 1 variation display game is in a high probability state (probable variation state, small hit RUSH state ) is determined (A20102). If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a high probability state (the result of A20102 is "Y"), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game required before changing the production mode The total number of rotations remaining in effect (total number of games remaining in effect), which is the total number of rotations, is updated by -1 (reduced by 1) (A20103). Since the gaming machine 10 is a ST machine in the present embodiment, at the start of the high probability state (at the end of the jackpot), the total number of remaining production rotations is the number of times the high probability state continues (continuous game number). It is set to 50 times, the number of high-probability fluctuations (initial value)). The number of continuations is the number of times the game can be continued, and the high probability state ends when a big hit occurs.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the total number of rotations remaining for effect is 0, that is, whether or not the high probability state (probability variable state, small hit RUSH state) has ended (A20104). When the total effect remaining rotation number is not 0 (the result of A20104 is "N"), that is, when the high probability state continues, the special figure 1 effect mode information check process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of rotations remaining for effect is 0 (the result of A20104 is "Y"), that is, if the high probability state ends, the process proceeds to step A20107.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not started in a high probability state (the result of A20102 is "N"), that is, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a normal game state, The game control device 100 updates the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of rotations (the number of executions) of the special figure 1 variation display game required until the special figure 1 effect mode is changed, by -1 (A20105). It is determined whether or not the number of rotations remaining for one effect has become 0 (A20106). In addition, the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation number is the remaining number of rotations until the special figure 1 effect mode change regarding the rotation number (execution number) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. If the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation number is not 0 (the result of A20106 is "N"), the special figure 1 effect mode information check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation number becomes 0 (the result of A20106 is "Y"), that is, when changing the special figure 1 effect mode from the next special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 effect mode information address table (A20107) and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the special figure primary mode transition information (A20108).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the special figure 1 production mode number of the special figure 1 production mode to be transferred, saves it in the special figure 1 production mode number area in the RWM (A20109), and transfers the special figure 1 production Acquire the mode's special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed (initial value), save it in the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed area in RWM (A20110), and use it at the end of the special figure 1 effect mode to be transferred this time Acquire the special figure primary mode transition information to be saved in the special figure primary mode transition information area in RWM (A20111).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the probability information command corresponding to the newly set special figure 1 effect mode number as the effect command (A20112), and executes the effect command setting process (A20113). Next, the effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set special figure 1 effect remaining rotation number is prepared as an effect command (A20114), and the effect command setting process is executed (A20115). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count (initial value) of the new special figure 1 production mode as a production command (A20116), and produces production command setting processing (A20117 ). It should be noted that after the end of the probability variation state, since there is no need to set the high probability variation frequency (initial value) in the new special figure 1 production mode, the processing of steps A20116 and A20117 may not be executed.

The probability information command includes the probability state after the end of the big hit state (special game state), the presence or absence of time saving (general electric support), the information of the production mode, and the like. In addition, in this embodiment, since there is no normal variable winning device 33 and no time saving (universal electricity support), the probability information command may not include information on the presence or absence of time saving (universal electricity support).

Next, it is determined whether or not the new special figure 1 production mode is a left-handed mode (A20118), and if it is not a left-handed mode (the result of A20118 is "N"), production mode information check processing is performed. finish. In addition, in the case of the left-handed mode (the result of A20118 is "Y"), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A20119), the effect command setting process is executed (A20120), and the effect mode End the information check process.

By the above processing, the effect control device 300 that receives the probability information command indicating the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) sets the probability state and executes the probability information setting processing for performing the processing corresponding to the probability state. (B1313, B1314 of single command processing). In addition, the effect control device 300, which has received the effect rotation speed command, can set the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed of the new special figure 1 effect mode, and thereafter receives the decoration special figure 1 stop command as a command for symbol stop. Each time, the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation number is updated by -1 (reduced by 1), and the subsequent special figure 1 effect remaining rotation number can be managed. As a result, the performance control device 300 can switch the performance in response to the switching (end) of the special figure 1 performance mode, or perform the performance of notifying the switching from before the switching of the special figure 1 performance mode. Furthermore, the production control device 300 that receives the high probability fluctuation frequency command (initial value) can set the high probability fluctuation frequency (initial value) of the new special figure 1 production mode. The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command can display on the display device 41 a left-handed instruction display that instructs left-handed.

In this way, the game control device 100, independently of the special figure 2 production mode, according to the special figure 1 production remaining number of rotations corresponding to the number of rotations (the number of executions) of the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 1 The game control corresponding to the special figure 1 performance mode during stay can be executed by managing the performance mode. Then, the production control device 300 that receives the command corresponding to the special figure 1 production mode generates a specific production only in a specific special figure 1 production mode, for example, the production corresponding to the special figure 1 production mode during stay can be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, since the transition from the high-probability state to the normal game state is managed not by the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation number but by the total effect remaining rotation number, no problem occurs.

[Special figure 2 display process]
FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 displaying process (second half) according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 displaying process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process. Incidentally, the processing other than steps A5846a, A5856a-A5856e is the same as the special figure 2 displaying processing (FIG. 44) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, the game control device 100, after step A5846, performs a special figure 2 effect related to the setting of the special figure 2 effect mode, which is the effect mode related to the special figure 2 variation display game. Mode information check processing is executed (A5846a), and processing shift setting processing during special figure 2 minor fanfare is executed (A5847). Also, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 effect mode information check process after step A5856 even when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a loss (A5856a). The details of the special figure 2 effect mode information check process will be described later.

After step A5856a, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 switching preparation remaining rotation number (special figure 2 switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the special figure 2 production mode number (A5856b), special figure 2 production It is determined whether or not the remaining number of rotations (special figure 2 effect remaining game number) and the number of remaining number of rotations for special figure 2 switching preparation match (A5856c). In addition, the special figure 2 switching preparation remaining number of rotations may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the production modes of the plurality of special figure 2 production modes, or a plurality of special figure 2 production modes It may be the same value (number of rotations) in any production mode, or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all production modes of a plurality of special figure 2 production modes.

The game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A5857 when the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed and the special figure 2 switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (the result of A5856c is "N").

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 production remaining rotation speed and the special figure 2 switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (the result of A5856c is "Y"), the special figure 2 production mode switching preparation command (A5856d), effect command setting processing (A5856e) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step A5857. The special figure 2 production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a specific production such as a look-ahead production from several rotations before the special figure 2 production mode switches (before several games), and the production control device 300 By receiving the special figure 2 production mode switching preparation command as a command for switching the production mode, it is possible to avoid contradictions in production across multiple special figure 2 production modes (single-shot system command processing B1317, B1318).

Alternatively, in step A5856b, the total switching preparation remaining rotation number (total switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the special figure 2 production mode number is set, and in step A5856c, the total production remaining rotation number (total production remaining game number ) and the total switching preparation remaining rotation speed match or not. In this way, the effect control device 300, before the number of games the total effect remaining rotation becomes zero and shifts from the probability variable state to the normal game state, the look-ahead effect by receiving the special figure 2 effect mode switching preparation command. It can be prohibited (B1317, B1318 of single command processing). In addition, the total production remaining rotation number is the remaining number of rotations until the production mode change regarding the total number of rotations (the number of executions) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

[Special figure 2 effect mode information check process]
FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 effect mode information check process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 effect mode information check process (A5846a, A5856a) in the special figure 2 displaying process. It should be noted that the special figure 2 effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is other than the big hit (small hit or loss).

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure secondary mode transition information is a no-update code (A20201). If the special figure secondary mode transition information is no update code (the result of A20201 is "Y"), the special figure 2 effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the special figure 2 production mode is not changed according to the number of executions of the executed special figure 2 variable display game, and for example, the special figure 2 production mode in which the high probability state continues until the next big hit. is selected.

In addition, when the special figure secondary mode transition information is not an update no code (the result of A20201 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines that the special figure 2 variation display game is in a high probability state (probable variation state, small hit RUSH state ) is determined (A20202). If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a high probability state (the result of A20202 is "Y"), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game required before changing the production mode The total number of rotations remaining in effect (total number of games remaining in effect), which is the total number of rotations, is updated by -1 (reduced by 1) (A20203). In this embodiment, since the gaming machine is an ST machine, at the start of the high probability state (at the end of the jackpot), the total number of remaining production rotations is a predetermined number (for example, 50 times, the number of high probability fluctuations (initial value)). is set.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the total number of rotations remaining for effect is 0, that is, whether or not the high probability state (probability variable state, small hit RUSH state) has ended (A20204). When the total effect remaining rotation number is not 0 (the result of A20204 is "N"), that is, when the high probability state continues, the special figure 2 effect mode information check process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of remaining effect rotations is 0 (result of A20204 is "Y"), that is, if the high probability state ends, the process proceeds to step A20207.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not started in a high probability state (the result of A20202 is "N"), that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a normal game state, The game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 production remaining rotation number, which is the number of rotations (the number of executions) of the special figure 2 variation display game required until the change of the special figure 2 production mode, by -1 (A20205), It is determined whether or not the number of rotations remaining for 2 effects has become 0 (A20206). In addition, the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation number is the remaining number of rotations until the special figure 2 effect mode change regarding the rotation number (execution number of times) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. If the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation number is not 0 (the result of A20206 is "N"), the special figure 2 effect mode information check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation number becomes 0 (the result of A20206 is "Y"), that is, when changing the special figure 2 effect mode from the next special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 effect mode information address table (A20207) and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the special figure secondary mode transition information (A20208).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the special figure 2 production mode number of the special figure 2 production mode to be transferred, saves it in the special figure 2 production mode number area in the RWM (A20209), and transfers the special figure 2 production Acquire the mode's special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed (initial value), save it in the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed area in RWM (A20210), and use it at the end of the special figure 2 effect mode to be shifted this time Acquire the special figure secondary mode transition information to be saved in the special figure secondary mode transition information area in RWM (A20211).

It should be noted that, if the total effect remaining rotation number is 0 (result of A20204 "Y"), that is, when the high probability state (potential variable state, small hit RUSH state) is completed, in step A20209, the special figure to move The special figure 2 production mode number of the 2 production mode becomes the number of the special mode (specific number 50 here), and the special figure 2 production mode will shift to the special mode. Then, in step A20210, the special figure 2 production remaining rotation number (initial value) of the special figure 2 production mode (special mode) to be shifted becomes the upper limit value "4" of the special figure 2 reservation number (A3015 in FIG. 123) . It should be noted that this special figure 2 effect remaining rotation number (initial value) may be set to the current special figure 2 reservation number at the end of the high probability state (variable probability state). Therefore, in the special mode, after the end of the high probability state, the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is within a predetermined number (here, the upper limit of the special figure 2 reservation number "4" or the special figure 2 reservation number at the end of the probability variation) continue until

Thereby, in the normal game state immediately after the end of the high-probability state (probability variable state, small hit RUSH state), the game control device 100 performs the special-figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the special-figure 2 start winning memory generated in the high-probability state. When executing , as a special mode, it is possible to execute a game control different from the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 start winning memory generated in the normal game state. For example, as described in FIG. 129 above, immediately after the end of the high probability state (probable variable state), the special figure 2 variable display game is a normal game state long variation (long variation time) variation pattern is set First, a short fluctuation (short fluctuation time) fluctuation pattern is set. Therefore, in the normal game state after the variable probability state (small hit RUSH state), the player stops the game and leaves the game machine 10, and the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game occurs in an unattended state. The probability (likelihood of unmanned jackpot occurrence) can be reduced.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the probability information command corresponding to the newly set special figure 2 production mode number as the production command (A20212), and executes the production command setting process (A20213). Next, the effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set special figure 2 effect remaining rotation number is prepared as an effect command (A20214), and the effect command setting process is executed (A20215). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count (initial value) of the new special figure 2 production mode as a production command (A20216), and produces production command setting processing (A20217). ). In addition, after the end of the probability variation state, since it is not necessary to set the high probability variation frequency (initial value) in the new special figure 2 production mode, the processing of steps A20216 and A20217 may not be executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the new special figure 2 production mode is a left-handed mode (A20218), and if it is not a left-handed mode (the result of A20218 is "N"), production mode information check processing is performed. finish. In addition, in the case of the left-handed mode (the result of A20218 is "Y"), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A20219), the effect command setting process is executed (A20220), and the effect mode End the information check process.

By the above processing, the effect control device 300 that receives the probability information command indicating the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) sets the probability state and executes the probability information setting processing for performing the processing corresponding to the probability state. (B1313, B1314 of single command processing). In addition, the effect control device 300 that receives the effect rotation speed command can set the special effect 2 effect remaining rotation speed of the new special effect 2 effect mode, and thereafter receives the decorative special effect 2 stop command as a command for pattern stop. Each time, the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation number is updated by -1 (reduced by 1), and the subsequent special figure 2 effect remaining rotation number can be managed. As a result, the performance control device 300 can switch the performance in response to the switching (end) of the special figure 2 performance mode, or perform the performance of notifying the switching from before the switching of the special figure 2 performance mode. Furthermore, the production control device 300 that receives the high probability fluctuation frequency command can set the high probability fluctuation frequency (initial value) of the new special figure 2 production mode. The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command can display on the display device 41 a left-handed instruction display that instructs left-handed.

In this way, the game control device 100, independently of the special figure 1 production mode, according to the special figure 2 production remaining number of rotations corresponding to the number of rotations (the number of executions) of the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 2 The game control corresponding to the special figure 2 performance mode during stay can be executed by managing the performance mode. Therefore, in the normal game state after the end of the variable probability state (small hit RUSH state), the special mode can be set until all execution of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 start memory generated during the variable probability state is completed. . Furthermore, during the special mode according to the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, 4 times after the probability variation state ends), the special figure based on the special figure 2 start memory (second start memory) that occurred during the probability variation state By setting a short-time variation pattern for the two-variation display game, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of unmanned jackpots.

In addition, the special figure 2 production mode can be managed independently from the special figure 1 production mode, and the production control device 300 that receives the command corresponding to the special figure 2 production mode can, for example, specify only in a specific special figure 2 production mode. It is possible to perform control for executing an effect corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode during stay, such as generating an effect, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the transition from the high probability state to the normal game state is managed by the total number of rotations remaining, not the number of rotations remaining in the special figure 2 effect, the high probability state ends if only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed. There is no problem of not doing so.

[Fanfare/In-interval processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the procedure of fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (A5726, A5826) in the special figure 1 displaying process and the special figure 2 displaying process. Note that processing other than steps A5916 to A5918 is the same as the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (FIG. 45) of the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

After step A5915, the game control device 100 saves the number of the effect mode 1 (for example, "1") in the special figure 1 effect mode number area and the special figure 2 effect mode number area (A5916). Then, the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed area, the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed area, and the total effect remaining rotation speed area are cleared (A5917). Subsequently, save the no-update code in the special figure primary mode transition information area and the special figure secondary mode transition information area (A5917), and end the fanfare/interval process transition setting process. In this way, the performance mode 1 during the big win state is set before the big win state starts.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot end processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process. It should be noted that the processing other than steps A6715a-A6715l is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot end processing (FIG. 53) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

The game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 effect mode information address table and a special figure 2 effect mode information address table after step A6715 (A6715a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information is acquired (A6715b). Incidentally, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308a-1 of the special figure 1 stop design setting process.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 2 effect mode number (A6715c). In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, it becomes a small hit RUSH state (variable probability state), so the special figure 1 production mode number and the special figure 2 production mode number here are the small hit RUSH mode ( probability variation mode) (for example, "2" and "12").

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the total remaining effect rotation number (initial value) after the end of the jackpot state (A6715d). As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of remaining production rotations is the number of rotations (or the number of games) in which the variable probability state (small hit RUSH state) continues (or the number of games). value)). Then, the special figure primary mode transition information and the special figure secondary mode transition information regarding the production mode after the end of the big hit state are acquired and saved (A6715e). Here, the special figure secondary mode transition information is information for transitioning to the special mode after the end of the probability variation state.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (high probability) corresponding to the newly set production mode number (indicating small hit RUSH mode, variable probability mode) as a production command (A6715f), and produces a production command. Setting processing is executed (A6715g). Then, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the total effect remaining rotation number (initial value) is prepared as an effect command (A6715h), and an effect command setting process is executed (A6715i).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count (initial value) after the end of the big hit as a production command (A6715j), and executes production command setting processing (A6715k). Here, the number of high probability fluctuations (initial value) is the same as the total number of rotations remaining for the above effect (initial value), and the number of rotations (or the number of games) that the probability variation state (small hit RUSH state) continues (or the number of games) It is set to the number of times (for example, 50 times). It should be noted that, in this embodiment, during the probability variation state is a single small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode), since the production mode does not change, the total number of production remaining rotations (initial value) and the number of high probability fluctuations (initial value) and are the same. However, if the production mode is to be changed finely even during the variable probability state, the total number of production remaining rotations (initial value) may be set smaller than the number of high-probability fluctuations (initial value).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are cleared (A6715l), and the process proceeds to step A6716.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process. It should be noted that the processing other than steps A6815a-A6815l is the same as the special figure 2 jackpot end processing (FIG. 54) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

The game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 effect mode information address table and a special figure 2 effect mode information address table after step A6815 (A6815a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information is acquired (A6815b). Incidentally, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308b-1 of the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A6815c-A6815l, and shifts to the processing of step A6816. It should be noted that the processing of steps A6815c-A6815l is the same as the processing of steps A6715c-A6715l of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, so the description is omitted.

[Transition example of production mode]
Drawing 137 (A) is a figure showing an example of transition (transition, change) of the production mode concerning a 3rd embodiment. The effect mode transition is performed based on the control of FIGS. 123 to 136 described above.

When the game state shifts in order from the special game state (big hit state) → variable probability state → normal game state, the special figure 1 production mode is the big hit mode → small hit RUSH mode (variable probability mode) → normal mode in order. Transition. In addition, in the probability variable state after the end of the special game state, the total number of production remaining rotations decreases corresponding to the increase in the total number of executions (total number of fluctuations) of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. When it becomes zero, the special figure 1 effect mode shifts (see FIG. 131).

Also, even during the normal game state, every time the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation number decreases and becomes zero in response to the increase in the number of executions of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the number of special figure 1 fluctuations), the special figure 1 The presentation mode shifts in order from normal mode A→normal mode B→normal mode C→normal mode D→normal mode E→normal mode F→ . . . (see FIG. 131). For example, the normal mode is switched every time the special figure 1 variation frequency increases by 100 after the probability variation state ends.

As an example, jackpot mode, small hit RUSH mode (variable probability mode), normal mode A, normal mode B, normal mode C, normal mode D, normal mode E, normal mode F special figure 1 production mode number is 1, respectively to 8. In addition, the special figure 1 effect mode number is not limited to this, and can be given as appropriate.

In addition, when the game state shifts in the order of special game state (big hit state) → variable probability state → normal game state, the special figure 2 production mode is jackpot mode → small hit RUSH mode (variable probability mode) → special mode (special production mode). In addition, in the probability variable state after the end of the special game state, the total number of production remaining rotations decreases corresponding to the increase in the total number of executions (total number of fluctuations) of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. When it becomes zero, the special figure 2 production mode shifts (see FIG. 133).

Also, even during the normal game state, every time the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation number decreases and becomes zero in response to the increase in the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the number of special figure 2 fluctuations), the special figure 2 The presentation mode shifts in the order of special mode→normal mode G→normal mode H→normal mode I→normal mode J→normal mode K→ . . . (see FIG. 133). Special mode (special production mode), after the probability variation state, when the special figure 2 fluctuation number is the upper limit value of the special figure 2 reservation number "4" (or the special figure 2 reservation number at the end of the probability variation), usually Switch to mode G. The normal mode G continues until the special figure 2 variation count reaches 200 after the probability variation state ends, and after the normal mode G, the normal mode switches each time the special figure 2 variation count increases by 100.

As an example, the jackpot mode, small hit RUSH mode (variable probability mode), special mode, normal mode G, normal mode H, normal mode I, normal mode J, normal mode K special figure 2 production mode numbers are 1, 12, 50, 14-18. In addition, the special figure 2 production mode number is not limited to this, and can be given as appropriate.

In addition, since the special figure 1 production mode and the special figure 2 production mode are independently determined, the production control device 300 can be used in the display device 41, the board production device 44 (movable accessory), etc., in the special figure 1 production mode. There is a possibility of giving priority (preferential treatment) to which effect of the effect of the FIG. 1 variable display game and the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 effect mode. So, in this embodiment, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 gives priority to the production|presentation of the special figure fluctuation|variation display game predetermined like FIG. 137(A) (preferential treatment).

In the small winning RUSH mode (probability variable state, small winning RUSH state), the main starting area for winning the game ball is the second starting winning opening 37 (FIG. 2), and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, Since the main variation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game, the performance of the special figure 2 variation display game is given priority (preferred treatment), and the player does not feel uncomfortable. For example, in the display device 41, in the small hit RUSH mode, the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game is enlarged display (main display, normal display) by large patterns, and the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game is reduced display by small patterns (sub displayed) or not displayed.

Conversely, in the normal mode (normal game state after the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency is 5), the main starting area to win the game ball is the first starting winning port 36 (Fig. 2) and the secondary starting area is the second starting Since it is the winning opening 37 and the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the performance of the special figure 1 variation display game is given priority (preferred treatment) and the player does not feel uncomfortable. For example, in the display device 41, in the normal mode, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is enlarged display (main display, normal display) with large patterns, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is reduced display (sub display) with small patterns. or not displayed.

In the special mode (normal game state with special figure 2 fluctuation count of 1 to 4), the main start area where the game ball should be won is the first start winning port 36 (Fig. 2), but the small hit RUSH mode (variable state ), the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 pending) is mainly executed. Therefore, in the special mode (special effect mode), although it is in the normal game state, the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is given priority (preferential treatment) so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. For example, in the display device 41, in the special mode, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is enlarged display (main display, normal display) with large patterns, and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is reduced display (sub display) with small patterns. or not displayed.

[Variation time]
FIG. 137B is a diagram showing an example of variable time according to the third embodiment. Control of the variation time as the variation pattern is performed based on the control of FIGS. 123 to 136 described above.

In the probability variation state, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game (that is, the special figure 1 variation time) is 60 sec, which is a long time (it may be said to be a medium time) (A4411). In addition, in the probability variation state, the special figure 1 variation display game has no reach, and the special figure 1 variation time may be fixed because the high probability final variation does not change the special figure 1 variation time. In addition, since the special figure 1 variation time is long, if the high probability final variation is the special figure 1 variation display game, it can be obtained in the big hit state before the probability variation state (small hit RUSH state) or the probability variation state Time for displaying the number of awarded balls and the like on the display device 41 by the effect control device 300 can be ensured. Also, the stop display time of the special figure 1 variation display game may be extended only for the high probability final variation to secure this time.

In the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuation time) varies depending on the presence or absence of reach, and is 3 seconds when there is no reach, and when there is reach, it is longer than when there is no reach. It becomes longer than 20 sec (A4402). The higher the expectation of the reach system (type), the longer the fluctuation time. Although the fluctuation time of the normal reach (N reach) is 20 sec, the SP reach is longer than 20 sec. In addition, in the normal game state, the special figure 1 fluctuation time does not depend on whether or not the special figure 2 production mode is the special mode.

Also, in the probability variable state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (that is, the special figure 2 variation time) is a short time of 1 sec in the basic case (when there is no reach and when there is no high probability final variation) (A4502). However, if there is a reach, the special figure 2 fluctuation time will be longer medium 20 sec or more compared to the short fluctuation. The higher the expectation of the reach system (type), the longer the fluctuation time. Although the fluctuation time of the normal reach (N reach) is 20 sec, the SP reach is longer than 20 sec. It is also assumed that medium fluctuation times are shorter than long fluctuations (eg, 10 minutes).

Also, in the case of a high probability final variation that started in a probability variation state, if there is no reach, the special figure 2 variation time is a medium 20 sec longer than 1 sec when it is not a high probability final variation (high probability If it is longer than the non-final variation, it is not limited to this). In the case of a high probability final variation that started in a probability variation state, if there is a reach, the special figure 2 variation time will be 20 seconds or longer, which is longer than the short variation, as in the case of no high probability final variation. . Thus, since the special figure 2 variation time is a medium time, when the high probability final variation is the special figure 2 variation display game, the probability variation state (small hit RUSH state) and the big hit before the probability variation state Time for displaying the number of prize balls obtained in the state on the display device 41 by the effect control device 300 can be ensured. Also, the stop display time of the special figure 2 variation display game may be extended only for the high probability final variation to secure this time.

In the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (that is, the special figure 2 variation time) differs depending on whether the special figure 2 production mode is a special mode (A4506a, A4502). In the special mode, even in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variation time is the same as the special figure 2 variation time in the probability variation state (if not the high probability final variation) (Note that it is about the same may be different). That is, in the special mode, the special figure 2 fluctuation time is 1 sec for a short time when there is no reach, and when there is a reach, it is longer than 20 sec, which is medium compared to short fluctuations, but long fluctuations (eg 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal game state after the variable probability state (small hit RUSH state), the player stops the game and leaves the game machine 10, and the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game occurs in an unattended state. The probability (likelihood of unmanned jackpot occurrence) can be reduced.

If it is a normal game state when it is not a special mode, the special figure 2 fluctuation time will be a longer fluctuation time (10 minutes) than the case of the special mode or the probability variable state. Thus, if the special figure 2 variation display game is a long variation (long variation) having a long variation time, the special figure is a big hit or a small hit that occurs in the special figure 1 variation display game during the long variation. The two-variation display game will be forced out and stopped. As a result, unless the special figure 2 production mode is a special mode, the profit of the player hitting right in the normal game state is reduced.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 138 is a screen transition diagram showing the transition of the screen of the display device 41 in the case of going from the small hit RUSH mode in the variable probability state to the normal mode through the special mode in the third embodiment.

In (A), the effect mode display 680 indicating the effect mode is displayed as "rush mode" indicating the small hit RUSH mode. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), in the variable probability state (small hit RUSH state, small hit rush state), in the display device 41, the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is given priority (preferential treatment), special figure 2 variable display Since the game effect is prioritized (preferential treatment), this "rush mode" is displayed as the special figure 2 effect mode.

Also, in (A), in the variable probability state, the special figure 2 variable display game by winning the second start winning port 37, which is the main start area, is enlarged and displayed (main displayed). In addition, the special figure 1 variable display game by winning the first start winning port 36, which is the secondary start area, is stopped as a reduced display (sub display) in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen. Stop symbols "4, 1, 5" are displayed in a small size. In addition, the special figure fluctuation display game by winning in the main start area may be called the main fluctuation display game (main fluctuation special figure), and the special figure fluctuation display game by winning in the secondary start area is the secondary fluctuation display game It may be called (following fluctuation special figure). In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game during variation here is a high probability final variation (final variation of the probability variation state).

The first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variation display game is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is stopped, and the execution state of the special figure 2 variation display game. The second predetermined image 676 indicating is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed (during fluctuation). The second predetermined image 676 “o” may blink as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

In the first display portion 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 suspension display 620a corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory) which is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game is not currently displayed. On the other hand, in the second display portion 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 suspension display 630a corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension (special figure 2 start memory) that is the execution right of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is displayed as a suspension display before digestion. 4 are displayed. These four special figure 2 pending display 630a corresponds to the pending occurring in the high probability state before the high probability final variation. In the pending digestion area 640, the special figure 2 pending display 630b is displayed as a starting memory display (variable pending display) corresponding to the starting memory related to the variable display game being executed. In addition, even if the special figure 1 reservation occurs, the special figure 2 reservation display 630a is given priority (preferred treatment) over the special figure 1 reservation display 620a on the display screen, and the special figure 1 reservation display 620a on the first display unit 620 may not be displayed.

In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 reservation number "0", and the special figure 2 reservation number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 reservation number "4".

Next, in (i), the special figure 2 variation display game of the high probability final variation is stopped in the variation display area 610, and the stop pattern "3, 4, 6" of the special figure 2 variation display game is displayed in a large size. At the same time, the variable probability state (small hit RUSH state) ends. The second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the special figure 2 variation display game changes to a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 . Other indications are the same as (A).

Subsequently, in (c), the normal game state is shifted after the probability variable state, but as shown in FIG. The performance mode shifts from the small hit RUSH mode to the special mode. Since the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is given priority (preferential treatment), the effect mode display 680 is displayed as "chance zone" indicating the special mode. Since it is a normal game state, a left-handed display may be displayed to encourage the player to play left-handed.

Also, in (C), the special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the suspension generated based on the winning of the second start winning port 37 in the high probability state (satisfaction of the second start condition) is performed in the normal game state Start. However, because it is a special mode, as described above, the variation time of this special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 variation time) is shorter than a long variation (for example, 10 minutes), for example, a short time when there is no reach 1 sec and, if there is reach, 20 sec, which is long medium compared to short fluctuations.

Furthermore, during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the player hits left in the normal game state, and the hold generated based on the winning of the first start winning port 36 (satisfaction of the first start condition) The special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to starts. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are in a state of being executed. As described above, in the special mode, although it is in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game is given priority (preferential treatment), and the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen. It is being executed as an enlarged display (main display). On the other hand, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed as a reduced display (sub-display) in the variable display area 613 at the left end. In this way, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The first predetermined image 675 indicating the execution state of the special figure 1 variation display game is the symbol "○", and the second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the special figure 2 variation display game is the symbol "○". It's becoming

In the second display portion 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 reserved display 630a is shifted to the right side, and three special figure 2 reserved displays 630a are displayed. In the pending digestion area 640, the special figure 2 pending display 630b is displayed as a starting memory display (variable pending display) corresponding to the starting memory related to the special figure 2 variable display game being executed. It should be noted that, in the pending digestion area 640, the special figure 2 pending display 630b is given priority (preferential treatment) over the special figure 1 pending display as the variable pending display. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 reservation number "0", and the special figure 2 reservation number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 reservation number "3".

Subsequently, in (E), the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped, and the stop pattern "8, 1, 3" of the special figure 2 variation display game is displayed in a large size. The second predetermined image 676 changes to a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 . Other indications are the same as (c).

After that, similarly, the suspension generated based on the winning to the second start winning port 37 in the high probability state is digested twice, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed twice. During this time, the special mode continues.

Next, in (O), the special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the last hold generated based on the winning to the second start winning port 37 in the high probability state starts in the normal game state. However, because it is a special mode, as described above, the variation time of this special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 variation time) is shorter than a long variation (for example, 10 minutes), for example, a short time when there is no reach 1 sec and, if there is reach, 20 sec, which is long medium compared to short fluctuations.

The first predetermined image 675 indicating the execution state of the special figure 1 variation display game is the symbol "○", and the second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the special figure 2 variation display game is the symbol "○". It's becoming In the second display portion 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 pending display 630a before digestion is not displayed. In the pending digestion area 640, a special figure 2 pending display 630b (variable pending display) is displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 reservation number "0", and the special figure 2 reservation number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 reservation number "0".

Subsequently, in (ka), the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped, and the stop pattern "5, 7, 2" of the special figure 2 variation display game is displayed in a large size. Then the special mode ends. The second predetermined image 676 changes to a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 . Other indications are the same as (o).

Next, in (ki), the normal mode starts after the special mode ends in the normal game state. In addition, in the normal game state after the end of the special mode, the effect of the special figure 1 variable display game is given priority (preferential treatment), and the special figure 1 variable display game continuing from (C) is displayed in the center part of the display screen. In area 610, it is executed as an enlarged display (main display). On the other hand, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed as a reduced display (sub-display) in the variable display area 615 at the right end.

In the first display portion 620 of the display screen, there is one special figure 1 suspension display 620a corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game as a suspension display before digestion. is displayed. In the pending digestion area 640, the special figure 1 pending display 620b is displayed as a variable pending display. In addition, even if the special figure 2 reservation occurs, the special figure 1 reservation display 620a is given priority (preferred treatment) over the special figure 2 reservation display 630a on the display screen, and the special figure 2 reservation display 630a on the second display unit 630 may not be displayed.

[Modification of the third embodiment]
A gaming machine 10 in a modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 150. FIG. In this modified example, the same configuration as the above-described third embodiment is applied to the second embodiment, but the configurations not described in this modified example are the configurations of the third embodiment, A configuration common to the configuration of the second embodiment (including the configuration of the first embodiment not described in the second embodiment) is also applicable. Although not described below, the control shown in FIGS. 123-127, 130, 132, and 134 can also be applied to the modified examples.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in the modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 139 summarizes each game state, and shows the control by the game control device 100, the control by the effect control device 300, and the characteristics of the game state in each game state. In this modified example, the game state includes a normal game state, a specific game state A, and a specific game state B.

FIG. 139 corresponds to FIG. 93 of the second embodiment, but in the modification of the third embodiment, the special figure 1 The special figure 2 variable display game is executed instead of the variable display game.

The normal game state is the same as the normal game state in FIG. 93 of the second embodiment. Specific game state A (probability variable state, small hit RUSH state) is the same as the second specific game state in FIG. The specific game state B (time saving state) is basically the same as the third specific game state in FIG. Therefore, the main fluctuation special figure (main fluctuation display game) becomes the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Also, in FIG. 139, there is no specific game state corresponding to the first specific game state in FIG.

When a variable probability big hit occurs in the normal game state or the specific game state B (time saving state), the game state shifts from the normal game state to the specific game state A after the big win state ends. In addition, since the specific game state A (probability variation state, small hit RUSH state) continues until the next big hit, the high probability variation frequency update process need not be executed.

[Game board]
FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board 30 in the modified example of the third embodiment. In FIG. 140, the position of the normal variable winning device 33 is changed from FIG. 91 of the second embodiment, and the normal variable winning device 33 is above the second start winning port 37 and the second special variable winning device 39, that is, the second It is provided upstream of the second start winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39 in the downstream direction of the game balls. Therefore, in the specific game state B (time saving state), even if the game ball frequently enters the winning opening (general electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33 due to the general electric support and a small winning occurs, the small winning occurs. At times, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are substantially prevented from winning.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process according to the modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 141 is the same as FIG. 128 except for the contents of step A4401.

In step A4401 of FIG. 141, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state or the high probability state. If neither the time saving state nor the high probability state (in the case of the normal game state) (the result of A4401 is "N"), proceed to the processing after step A4402. When it is a time saving state or a high probability state (the result of A4401 is "Y"), it progresses to the process after step A4408.

[Tokuzu 2 information setting process]
Figure 142 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process according to the modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 142 is the same as FIG. 129 except for the contents of step A4501.

In step A4501 of FIG. 142, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state or the high probability state. When it is a time saving state or a high probability state (the result of A4501 is "Y"), it progresses to the process after step A4502.

If neither time saving state nor high probability state (normal game state) (the result of A4501 is "N"), proceed to the processing after step A4504, special figure 2 production mode number special mode number (here specific number 50) If not (the result of A4506a is "N"), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set to a long fluctuation (long fluctuation time, for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 effect mode number is the number of the special mode (specific number 50 here) (the result of A4506a is "Y"), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is short compared to the long fluctuation A short fluctuation (short fluctuation time, for example, 1 sec) fluctuation pattern is set (from step A4502).

[Special figure 1 effect mode information check process]
Figure 143 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 production mode information check processing which relates to the modification of 3rd execution form. FIG. 143 is the same as FIG. 131 except for the contents of steps A20102 and A20116.

In step A20102 of FIG. 143, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is started in a time saving state or a high probability state (probability variable state, small hit RUSH state). If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a short time state or a high probability state (the result of A20102 is "Y"), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and special figure 2 fluctuation required before changing the production mode The total remaining effect rotation number, which is the total number of rotations of the displayed game, is updated by -1, and it is determined whether or not the total remaining effect rotation number is 0 (A20103, A20104). In this modification, at the start of the time saving state (at the end of the jackpot), the total number of production remaining rotations is a predetermined number of times that the time saving state continues (for example, 50 times, the number of time saving fluctuations (initial value)). . In addition, the number of times of continuation is the number of times that can be continued, and when a big hit occurs, the time saving state ends.

However, in this modification, since the gaming machine 10 is not a ST machine, the number of times that the high probability state can be continued is until the next big hit, and is infinite unless the big hit occurs. ), the total number of rotations remaining for the effect is set to an impossibly huge number (for example, 50000 times). Thus, in a high-probability state (probability variable state), the total performance remaining rotation number does not become 0, the special figure 1 performance mode is not changed until the next big hit, and the small hit RUSH mode (probability variable mode) is maintained. At the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the jackpot), the game machine 10 may be configured to be the ST machine by setting the total number of remaining effect rotations to about 100 times. Also, just before the start of the high probability state (at the end of the jackpot), the special figure primary mode transition information is set to no update code (the result of A20101 is "Y"), and the high probability state continues until the next jackpot good.

In the time saving state, if the total number of production remaining rotations is 0 (the result of A20104 is "Y"), that is, when the time saving state (general electric support) ends, the special figure 1 production mode to be transferred An effect mode number and the like are set (A20107-A20120).

In step A20116 of FIG. 143, the game control device 100 is a time-saving variation frequency command or a high-probability variation frequency command corresponding to the time-saving variation frequency (initial value) or the high-probability variation frequency (initial value) of the new special figure 1 production mode. is prepared as a production command. Subsequently, effect command setting processing (A20117) is executed. In addition, after the time-saving state or probability variable state ends, there is no need to set the number of time-saving fluctuations (initial value) or the number of high-probability fluctuations (initial value) in the new special figure 1 production mode, so the processing of steps A20116 and A20117 is executed. You don't have to.

[Special figure 2 effect mode information check process]
FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 effect mode information check process according to the modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 144 is the same as FIG. 132 except for the contents of steps A20202 and A20216 from FIG.

In step A20202 of FIG. 144, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is started in a time saving state or a high probability state (probability variable state, small hit RUSH state). When the special figure 2 variable display game is started in a short time state or a high probability state (the result of A20202 is "Y"), the total number of production remaining rotations is updated by -1, and the total number of production remaining rotations is 0 It is determined whether or not there is (A20203, A20204).

In this modification, at the start of the time-saving state (at the end of the jackpot), the total number of production remaining rotations is the number of times that the time-saving state can be continued. there is On the other hand, at the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the jackpot), the total number of remaining effects is set to an impossible number (for example, 50000 times). Thus, in a high probability state (probability variable state), the total performance remaining rotation number does not become 0, the special figure 2 performance mode is not changed until the next big hit, and the small winning RUSH mode (variable probability mode) is maintained. In addition, just before the start of the high probability state (at the end of the jackpot), the special figure 2nd mode transition information is set to no update code (the result of A20101 is "Y"), and the high probability state continues until the next jackpot good.

In the time saving state, if the total number of production remaining rotations is 0 (the result of A20204 is "Y"), that is, when the time saving state (general electric support) ends, the special figure 2 of the special figure 2 production mode to be transferred An effect mode number and the like are set (A20207-A20220).

It should be noted that, in the time saving state, if the total number of production remaining rotation is 0 (result of A20204 "Y"), that is, if the time saving state ends, in step A20209, the special figure of the special figure 2 production mode to be transferred The 2 effect mode number becomes the special mode number (specific number 50 here), and the special figure 2 effect mode shifts to the special mode. Then, in step A20210, the special figure 2 production remaining rotation number (initial value) of the special figure 2 production mode (special mode) to be shifted becomes the upper limit value "4" of the special figure 2 reservation number (A3015 in FIG. 123) . In addition, this special figure 2 effect remaining rotation number (initial value) may be set to the current special figure 2 reservation number at the end of the time saving state. Therefore, in the special mode, after the time saving ends, the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a predetermined number (here, the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reserved "4" or the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the time saving end) Continues to within do.

As a result, in the normal game state immediately after the end of the time saving state, the game control device 100, when executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 start winning memory generated in the time saving state, normal as a special mode A game control different from the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 start winning memory generated in the game state can be executed. For example, based on FIG. 142 described above, immediately after the end of the time saving state, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is in the normal game state, the long fluctuation (long fluctuation time) fluctuation pattern is not set, and the short fluctuation (short fluctuation time) is set.

In step A20216 of FIG. 144, the game control device 100 is a time-saving variation frequency command or a high-probability variation frequency command corresponding to the time-saving variation frequency (initial value) or the high-probability variation frequency (initial value) of the new special figure 2 production mode. is prepared as a production command. Subsequently, effect command setting processing (A20117) is executed. In addition, after the time-saving state or probability-variable state ends, there is no need to set the number of time-saving fluctuations (initial value) or the number of high-probability fluctuations (initial value) in the new special figure 2 production mode, so the processing of steps A20216 and A20217 is executed. You don't have to.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
The details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the modification of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 is a first flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot end processing according to the modification of the third embodiment. Also, FIG. 146 is a second flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process according to the modification of the third embodiment.

In FIG. 145, steps A16717a-A16717l are executed between steps A16717 and A16718, but the rest is the same as in FIG. 99 of the second embodiment except for A16706, A16708, A16716 and A16717. The processing of steps A16717a-A16717l is basically the same as steps A6715a-A6715l of FIG.

In addition, since there is no general electric support in the specific game state A (probability variable state, small winning RUSH state), in FIG. Save to data area. In step A16708, the signal regarding the start of high probability & without time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. In step A16716, a high probability & no time saving flag is saved in a special figure game mode flag area. In step A16717, the initial value of the high probability fluctuation frequency (for example, 50000 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency region for holding the high probability fluctuation frequency, but the initial value of the time saving fluctuation frequency is not saved.

In FIG. 145, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 effect mode information address table and a special figure 2 effect mode information address table after step A16717 (A16717a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information is acquired (A16717b). It should be noted that the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308a-1 of the special figure 1 stop design setting process, and are information for moving to the probability variation state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 2 effect mode number (A16717c). It should be noted that here, by the determination of A16705, after the jackpot state end small hit RUSH state (variable probability state) for the case (step A16705 result "N"), special figure 1 production mode number here, and , The special figure 2 effect mode number is a number (for example, "2" and "12") corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode (variable probability mode).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the total remaining effect rotation number (initial value) after the end of the jackpot state (A16717d). As described above, in this modified example, since the gaming machine 10 is not an ST machine, the number of times the high probability state can be continued is infinite unless a big win is achieved. The total number of rotations remaining for the effect is set to an impossibly huge number (for example, 50000 times). Then, the special figure primary mode transition information and the special figure secondary mode transition information regarding the production mode after the end of the jackpot state are acquired and saved (A16717e). In addition, since the high probability state continues until the next big hit, the special figure primary mode transition information and the special figure secondary mode transition information may be set to the no update code as described above.

The processing of the next steps A16717f-A16717l is the same as that of steps A6715f-A6715l of FIG. 135, and the description thereof is omitted.

In FIG. 146, steps A16731a-A16731l are executed between steps A16731 and A16732, but the rest is the same as in FIG. 100 of the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 effect mode information address table and a special figure 2 effect mode information address table after step A16731 (A16731a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information is acquired (A16731b). It should be noted that the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308a-1 of the special figure 1 stop design setting process, and are information for shifting to the time saving state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 2 effect mode number (A16731c). It should be noted that here, by the determination of A16705, for the case of time saving state after the end of the jackpot state (result of step A16705 "Y"), special figure 1 production mode number here, and special figure 2 production mode The numbers are numbers (for example, "32" and "42") corresponding to the time saving state (time saving mode).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the total remaining effect rotation number (initial value) after the end of the jackpot state (A16731d). As described above, in the present modification, the total number of remaining production rotations is the number of rotations (or the number of games) in which the time saving state continues. . Then, the special figure primary mode transition information and the special figure secondary mode transition information regarding the performance mode after the end of the big hit state are acquired and saved (A16731e). Here, the special figure secondary mode shift information is information for shifting to the special mode after the end of the time saving state.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the probability information command (low probability) corresponding to the newly set production mode number (indicating the time saving mode) as the production command (A16731f), and executes the production command setting process. (A16731g). Then, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the total effect remaining rotation number (initial value) is prepared as an effect command (A16731h), and an effect command setting process is executed (A16731i).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a time saving variation number command corresponding to the time saving variation number (initial value) after the end of the big hit as an effect command (A16731j), and executes an effect command setting process (A16731k). Here, the number of time-saving fluctuations (initial value) is the same as the total number of remaining production rotations (initial value), and is the number of rotations (or the number of games) that can be continued in the time-saving state (for example, 50 times, It is set to the number of time reduction fluctuations (initial value)). In addition, in this modification, it is a single time-saving mode during the time-saving state, and since the production mode does not change, the total number of production remaining rotations (initial value) and the number of time-saving fluctuations (initial value) are the same. However, when finely changing the production mode during the time saving state, the total number of production remaining rotations (initial value) may be set smaller than the time saving fluctuation frequency (initial value).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are cleared (A16731l), and the process proceeds to step A16732.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
The details of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing (A3317) in the modified example of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a first flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing according to the modification of the third embodiment. Also, FIG. 148 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process according to the modification of the third embodiment.

In FIG. 147, steps A16817a-A16817l are executed between steps A16817 and A16818, but the others are the same as FIG. 101 of the second embodiment except for A16806, A16808, A16816, and A16817. The processing of steps A16817a-A16817l is the same as the processing of steps A16717a-A16717l in FIG. 145, and the description thereof is omitted.

In addition, since there is no general electric support in the specific game state A (probability variable state, small winning RUSH state), in FIG. Save to data area. In step A16808, the signal regarding the start of high probability & without time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. In step A16816, a high probability & no time saving flag is saved in a special figure game mode flag area. In step A16817, the initial value of the high probability fluctuation frequency (for example, 50000 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency region for holding the high probability fluctuation frequency, but the initial value of the time saving fluctuation frequency is not saved.

In FIG. 148, steps A16831a-A16831l are executed between steps A16831 and A16832, but the rest is the same as in FIG. 102 of the second embodiment. The processing of steps A16831a-A16831l is the same as the processing of steps A16731a-A16731l in FIG. 146, and the description thereof is omitted.

[Transition example of production mode (modification)]
FIG. 149(A) is a diagram showing an example of transition (transition, change) of the production mode according to the modification of the third embodiment. The transition of the production mode is performed based on the control of FIGS. 141-148 described above.

The game state shifts in the order of special game state (big hit state) → specific game state A (probability variable state, small hit RUSH state) → special game state (big hit state) → specific game state B (time saving state) → normal game state. In this case, the special figure 1 effect mode shifts in order from big hit mode→small hit RUSH mode (probability variable mode)→big hit mode→time saving mode→normal mode. In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the special game state (jackpot state), the total production remaining rotation corresponding to the increase in the total number of executions of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (total number of fluctuations) When the number decreases and becomes zero, the special figure 1 production mode shifts (see FIG. 143).

Also, even during the normal game state, every time the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation number decreases and becomes zero in response to the increase in the number of executions of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the number of special figure 1 fluctuations), the special figure 1 The effect modes are shifted in the order of normal mode A→normal mode B→normal mode C→normal mode D→normal mode E→normal mode F→ . . . (see FIG. 143). For example, the normal mode is switched every time the special figure 1 variation frequency increases by 100 after the probability variation state ends.

As an example, jackpot mode, small hit RUSH mode (variable probability mode), normal mode A, normal mode B, normal mode C, normal mode D, normal mode E, normal mode F, special figure 1 production mode number of the time saving mode, 1 to 8 and 32, respectively. In addition, the special figure 1 effect mode number is not limited to this, and can be given as appropriate.

In addition, the game state is special game state (big hit state) → specific game state A (probability variable state, small hit RUSH state) → special game state (big hit state) → specific game state B (time saving state) → normal game state in order In the case of shifting, the special figure 2 performance mode shifts in the order of big hit mode→small hit RUSH mode (probability variable mode)→big hit mode→time saving mode→special mode (special effect mode). In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the special game state (jackpot state), the total production remaining rotation corresponding to the increase in the total number of executions of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (total number of fluctuations) When the number decreases and becomes zero, the special figure 2 effect mode shifts (see FIG. 144).

Also, even during the normal game state, every time the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation number decreases and becomes zero in response to the increase in the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the number of special figure 2 fluctuations), the special figure 2 The effect mode shifts in the order of special mode→normal mode G→normal mode H→normal mode I→normal mode J→normal mode K→normal mode L→ . . . (see FIG. 144). In the special mode (special production mode), after the time saving state ends, when the number of special figures 2 fluctuations is greater than "4" (or the number of special figures 2 pending at the end of the probability variation), which is the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 pending, usually Switch to mode G. The normal mode G continues until the special figure 2 variation count reaches 100 after the probability variation state ends, and after the normal mode G, the normal mode switches every time the special figure 2 variation count increases by 100.

As an example, jackpot mode, small hit RUSH mode (variable probability mode), time saving mode, special mode, normal mode G, normal mode H, normal mode I, normal mode J, normal mode K, normal mode L special figure 2 production mode The numbers are 1, 12, 42, 50, 43-48 respectively. In addition, the special figure 2 production mode number is not limited to this, and can be given as appropriate.

In addition, in this modification, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 gives priority to the production|presentation of the special figure fluctuation|variation display game predetermined like FIG.137(A) (preferential treatment).

In the small hit RUSH mode (probability variable state, small hit RUSH state) and the time saving mode, the main starting area where the game ball should be won is the second starting winning port 37 or the normal variable winning device 33, and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning. Since it is mouth 36 and the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the production of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is given priority (preferential treatment). For example, in the display device 41, in the small hit RUSH mode or the time saving mode, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is enlarged by large patterns (main display, normal display), and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is reduced by small patterns. Displayed (sub-displayed) or not displayed.

Conversely, in the normal mode (normal game state after the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency is 5), the main starting area to win the game ball is the first starting winning port 36 (Fig. 2) and the secondary starting area is the second starting Since it is the winning port 37 or the normal variation winning device 33, and the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game is given priority (preferential treatment). For example, in the display device 41, in the normal mode, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is enlarged display (main display, normal display) with large patterns, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is reduced display (sub display) with small patterns. or not displayed.

In the special mode (normal game state with a special figure 2 fluctuation count of 1 to 4), the main start region where the game ball should be won is the first start winning port 36 (Fig. 2), but the special that occurred during the time saving state A special figure 2 variable display game based on the FIG. 2 startup winning memory (special figure 2 pending) is mainly executed. Therefore, in the special mode (special effect mode), although it is in the normal game state, the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is prioritized (preferential treatment). For example, in the display device 41, in the special mode, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is enlarged display (main display, normal display) with large patterns, and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is reduced display (sub display) with small patterns. or not displayed.

At the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the jackpot), the game machine 10 may be configured to be the ST machine by setting the total number of rotations remaining to the initial value of about 100 times. , After the end of the probability variable state (small hit RUSH state), the special figure 1 production mode may enter the normal mode, and the special figure 2 production mode may enter the special mode.

[Variable time (modified example)]
FIG. 149B is a diagram showing an example of variable time according to the modification of the third embodiment. Control of the variation time as the variation pattern is performed based on the control described above. Even in the time saving state, the variation time is the same as the probability variation state except for the final variation. There is no distinction other than the final change and the final change for the change time of the probability change state. Others are the same as in FIG. 137(B). In addition, it is good also as variable time which is different in a time saving state and a probability variable state.

[Screen transition diagram (modification)]
FIG. 150 is a screen transition diagram showing transition of the screen of the display device 41 in the case of changing from the time saving state (time saving mode) to the normal mode through the special mode in the modification of the third embodiment. (A') is the time saving mode, (I') is the end of the final variation of the time saving state, (C) to (Ki) are the same as in FIG. 38 and will not be described.

Thus, in the modification of the third embodiment, in the normal game state after the end of the time saving state, until the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 start memory generated during the time saving state is all completed A special mode can be set. In addition, during the special mode according to the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, 4 times after the end of the variable state), the special figure based on the special figure 2 start memory (second start memory) that occurred during the time saving state By setting a short-time variation pattern for the two-variation display game, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of unmanned jackpots.

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
In the third embodiment and its modification, the gaming machine 10 includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays the identification information on the display device based on the establishment of the starting condition. When the result of the displayed game is a special result, it is possible to generate a special game state in which game value can be given to the player. A game control means (game control device 100) is a first control means (special figure 1 game process) that performs execution control of a first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on establishment of a first start condition. and a second control means (special figure 2 game processing) that controls the execution of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the establishment of the second start condition. Both the first variable display game by the first control means and the second variable display game by the second control means can be in a state of being executed. The first control means can set the variation pattern of the first variation display game according to the number of times the first variation display game is performed. It is possible to set the variation pattern of the variation display game.

According to such a gaming machine 10, a specific mode (special mode ), before entering a specific mode (for example, during variable probability mode or during short time mode) based on the starting memory (for example, special figure 2 starting memory, second starting memory) based on the one variable display game (for example, special figure A short-time variation pattern can be set for the 2-variation display game). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a special game state (big win) occurring in an unmanned state. If the variation patterns of the first variation display game and the second variation display game are set according to the total number of executions of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, such a specific mode (special mode) can be set. For only one variable display game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) based on the starting memory (for example, special figure 2 starting memory, second starting memory) that occurred before entering (for example, during probability variable mode or time saving mode) , it becomes difficult to set a short-term variation pattern during a specific mode.

In the third embodiment and its modification, the game control means (game control device 100) is different from the special game state specific game state (for example, probability variable state, small hit RUSH state, time saving state), and after the specific game state It is possible to generate a normal game state. The second control means sets a long-time variation pattern for the second variation display game based on the establishment of the second starting condition in the normal game state. When the second variable display game is executed in the normal game state, the second control means provides a short-time variation pattern for the second variable display game based on the establishment of the second start condition in the specific game state. set.

According to such a gaming machine 10, during a specific mode (special mode) corresponding to the number of executions of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (for example, four times after the end of the specific game state) , A short-time variation pattern is set for the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the start memory (for example, special figure 2 start memory, second start memory) that occurred during the specific game state. Thus, in the normal game state after the specific game state, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a special game state (big hit) occurring in an unmanned state.

In the third embodiment and its modification, an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the variable display game is provided. The first control means can set a first effect mode (special figure 1 effect mode) according to the number of executions of the first variable display game, and can change the variation pattern of the first variable display game according to the first effect mode. set. The second control means can set a second effect mode (special figure 2 effect mode) according to the number of executions of the second variable display game, and can change the variation pattern of the second variable display game according to the second effect mode. set. The effect control means (effect control device 300) executes the second variation display game in the normal game state based on the establishment of the second starting condition in the specific game state (for example, variable probability state, small hit RUSH state, time saving state). When there is, the performance corresponding to the second performance mode is given priority (preferential treatment) over the first performance mode.

According to such a gaming machine 10, even when the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is the main variation display game in the normal game state, the second variation display game based on the establishment of the second start condition in the specific game state When the 2 variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed in the normal game state, the second effect mode (special figure 2 effect mode) relating to the second variable display game is preferentially executed. Since it is conspicuous as it is, it does not give the player a sense of incompatibility.

In the third embodiment and its modification, the game control means (game control device 100) changes the game state after the special game state (for example, probability variable state, time saving state) to the first variation in the game state Control is performed according to the total number of executions of the display game and the second variation display game (that is, the total number of executions of the first variation display game and the number of executions of the second variation display game).

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, there is no problem that the game state does not shift (change) if only one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is executed.

In the third embodiment and its modification, at least one of the first game state (for example, normal game state) and the second game state (specific game state (probability variable state or time saving state)) can be generated after the end of the special game state. is. The game control means performs execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning to the first start winning port 36), and performs the second starting. Execution control of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is performed based on establishment of conditions (for example, winning to the second starting winning port 37 or the normal variable winning device 33). The game control means can bring the first variable display game and the second variable display game into a state of being executed. Effect control means (effect control device 300), in the first game state (for example, normal game state), the first effect (decorative special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 1 pending display 620a, etc.) related to the first variable display game ) can be executed with priority (preferential treatment), and in the second game state (specific game state), the second effect related to the second variation display game (decorative special figure 2 variation display game, special figure 2 pending display 630a etc.) can be executed with priority (preferential treatment). Under a predetermined condition, even in the first game state, the effect control means can execute the second effect related to the second variable display game with priority (preferential treatment) over the first effect. Note that the predetermined condition includes the case of a special mode and the case of a big hit in the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game).

According to such a gaming machine 10, even in the first game state (for example, normal game state), the second variable display game is frequently executed (special mode), and the second variable display game becomes a big hit, which is important. If so, the second effect related to the second variable display game can be executed with priority (preferential treatment) over the first effect. Therefore, the performance can be executed flexibly, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of its technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. It is also possible to combine multiple embodiments. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

10 Game Machine 30 Game Board 32 Game Area 33 Ordinary Fluctuation Winning Device (Ordinary Electric Winning Port)
36 1st Startup Winning Port (1st Startup Winning Area)
37 2nd Startup Winning Port (2nd Startup Winning Area)
38 first special variable winning device 39 second special variable winning device 41 display device 44 board effect device 46 board decoration device 100 game control device (main board)
300 production control device (sub board)

Claims (1)

A game control means capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information on a display device based on establishment of a starting condition is provided, and a game value can be given to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine that can generate a special game state,
The game control means is
first control means for controlling the execution of the first variable display game based on the establishment of the first starting condition;
a second control means for controlling the execution of the second variable display game based on the establishment of the second starting condition;
Both the first variable display game by the first control means and the second variable display game by the second control means are being executed,
After the end of the special game state, it is possible to shift to a first game state and a second game state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the first start condition, and the second game. It is possible to shift to the first game state after the state,
in the first game state, when the number of executions of the second variation display game after shifting to the first game state exceeds a predetermined number of times, setting the variation time of the second variation display game to a predetermined time; setting the variation time of the second variation display game to a variation time shorter than the predetermined time when the number of executions of the second variation display game after shifting to the first game state is within the predetermined number of times;
The second game state after the end of the special game state is controlled according to the total number of executions of the first variable display game and the second variable display game during the second game state. Amusement machine.

Images